Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center

Owner`s Manual - GM Owner Center
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
e The 1998 Chevrolet Monte Carlo Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “air bag” system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
YourDrivingandtheRoad
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if
you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you howto keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
8- 1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet
for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page
8-10,
9-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing
of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
voluntary
We support
technician certification.
f
GENERAL MOTORS,GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name MONTE CARLO are registered trademarks
of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includesthe latest information at the time it
was printed.We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after thattime without further notice.For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
so it willbe
there if you ever needit when you’re on the road.
If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in
so itthe new
owner can use it.
-
- ...
I
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institutefor
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propribtaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en franpis chez
votre concessionaireou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10285607 A First Edition
ii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
@CopyrightGeneral Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
The dynamic William C. “Billy”
Durant shiftedgears frommaking
carriages to making cars,
forming half the team thatgave
birth to Chevrolet.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
In 1932 Chevrolet
introduced the
Synchro-Mesh
transmission and
ofSered a host of
accessories -- including
such niceties as a clock!
The legacy of America's favorite sportscar
began in 1953, when 319 hand-assembled
white Corvettes
launched
the
first use of a
Jiberglassbody in
a production car:
I
I
I
I
I
,,,,,,,,,,,,I
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
I
The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American
public -- and was poweredby an available fuel-injected V8.
I
60 S automotive excitement
included Chevrolet landmarks
like the Corvette Sting Ray,
the sporty Camaro, and
powerplants like the
legendary 327 V8.
Your new Chevrolet continuesa tradition of quality and value.
V
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual
from beginning
to endwhen they first receive theirnew vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learnabout the features and
controls for your vehicle.In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
Index
A good place to look
for what you need is the
Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list
of what’s in
the manual, and thepage number where you’ll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number
of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell
you
about things that couldhurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
r
These mean thereis something thatcould hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area,we tell you what the hazardis. Then
we tell you what todo to help avoidor reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you don’t, you or
others couldbe hurt.
1
1
You will also finda circle
with a slash throughit in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this’’ or “Don’t
let this happen.”
In the notice area, we tell you about something that
can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage
find these notices:wouldnotbecoveredby
your warranty,and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell you what do
to to help
avoid the damage.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also,inthisbookyouwill
I
NOTICE:
I
I
These mean there
is something that could
damage your vehicle,
-
.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUnON and NOTICE warr&gs in different colors
or in different words.
I
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTIONor NOTICE.
vii
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on
your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
CAUSTIC
BURNS
FLASHER
A
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
BRAKE
COOLANT
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
k
ENGINE
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
,\I/,
FOG LAMPS
L
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
$0
VENTILATING
FAN
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
I-1
FUSE
P
LIGHTER
(a)
a
w,
(@)
HORN
SPEAKER
FUEL
)tr
b
p3
0Section 1
SeatsandRestraintSystems
Here you’llfind information about the seats in your Chevrolet and how to use your safety belts properly.
You can also
learn aboutsome things you shouldnot do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-7
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-26
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many PeopleAsk About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air BagSystem
Center Passenger Position
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1-27
1-31
1-33
1-36
1-48
1-5 1
1-51
1-5 1
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
for
Children and Small Adults
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tellsyou how to adjust the seats and
explains reclining seatbacks, folding rear seats and
head restraints.
2-Way Manual Front Seat
I
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
Lift the bar under the
front of the seat to unlockit. Slide
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat
only when
the seat to whereyou want it and release the bar.Try to
the vehicle is not moving.
move the seat with your body be
to sure the seat is
locked into place.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Driver’s 4-Way Manual Seat (Option)
Lift thishandle to tilt the seatup or down.
The driver’s seat mayhave a bar and ahandle under the
front edge of the seat. Lift thebar to unlock the seat and
slide it forward and backward.
1-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Driver’s Side Power Seat (Option)
Reclining Front Seatbacks
FRONT (A): Raise thefront of the seatby holding the
switch up. Hold the switch down lower
to
the frontof
the seat.
CENTER (B):Move the seat forwardor backward by
holding the control to the front
or to the back. Raise or
lower the seat by holdingthe control up or down.
REAR (C): Raise the rearof the seat by holding the
switch up. Hold the switch down to lower the of
rear
the seat.
1-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move the
seatback to whereyou want it. Release the lever to
lock the seatback into place. Pull
up on the lever
without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will
move forward.
But don’thave a seatback reclinedif your vehicle
is moving.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is
in motion canbe dangerous. Evenif you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do theirwhen
job
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder beltcan’t do its job.In a crash you
could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do
its job either. In a crash the
belt couldgo up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause seriousinternal injuries.
For proper protectionwhen the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
estraints
it Head
Slide the head restraint upor down so that the topof the
restraint is closest to the top
of your ears.This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Seatback Latches
The front seat folds forward
to let people get into the
back seat.Your seatback
will move back and forth
freely, unless you cometo a
sudden stop. Then it will
lock into place.
If your vehicleis parked facing downa fairly steep hill,
the seatbackmay not fold without some help from you.
To fold the locked seatback forward, push the seatback
toward the rear and lift this latch.
Then the seatbackwill
fold forward.The latch must be downfor the seatto
work properly.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Pull forward on the seat tab latch
to fold the seat cushion
down. This feature allows you direct access
to the trunk.
To return the seat to its original position, push it back up
and make sureit latches.
Safety Belts: They’refor Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how touse safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should notdo
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
Don’t let anyoneride where heor she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt,your injuries
can be much worse.You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not beif you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in theseareas are more likelyto be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto
ride in anyarea of your vehiclethat is not
equipped with seatsand safety belts. Besure
everyone in your vehicle is ainseat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as areminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt ReminderLight” in
the Index.)
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why:They work.
You never knowif you’ll bein a crash.If you do have
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride inor on anything, yougo as fastas
it goes.
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashesare mild, and some crashescan be so
serious that even buckled
up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashesare in between. In many
of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
I
After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s
just a seat
on wheels.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
.
.
Put someone on it.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Get it up to speed. Thenstop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
The person keeps going until stoppedby something.
In areal vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
or the instrument panel...
Here Are Questions Many PeopleAsk
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bonestake the forces. That’s why
safety belts makesuch good sense.
@
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle afteran
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearinga safety
belt or not. But you canunbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,so
you can unbuckle and get out,is much greater if
you are belted.
@
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systemsonly; so they work with
safety belts-- not insteadof them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use
of safety belts. Evenif you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially inside and other collisions.
1-11
- -
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
...
Q:
If I’ma good driver, andI never drive far from
home, why shouldI wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, butif you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault-- you and
your passengerscan be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protectyou from things beyond your
control, suchas bad drivers.
Most accidentsoccur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. Andthe greatest numberof serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts arefor everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in
your vehicle, see the part
of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describesthe driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to seehow, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can situp straight.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
sure it is secure.
Pull upon the latch plate to make
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the endof this section.
Make sure the release button onthe buckle is
positioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
The shoulder belt maylock if you pullthe belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, letthe belt go back
slightly to unlock it, Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pullup on the shoulder belt.
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips,just touching the thighs.In a crash,this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go
over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or
if you pull the belt very quickly out
of the retractor.
1-14
..
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
A:
The shoulder beltis too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
What’s wrong withthis?
A CAUTIOl.:
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.
In a crash,
the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen,
The belt forces would be there, not
at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into
the
buckle nearestyou.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
&= What’s wrong with this?
A CAUTION:
You can beseriously injured if you wear the
a crash, your
shoulder belt under your arm. In
body would move too far forward,which would
increase the chanceof head andneck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severelyinjure internal organs
like your liveror spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should
be worn over theshoulder at all times.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
@
What’s wrong with this?
In
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly,
or ask
your dealer tofix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the buttonon the buckle.
The belt shouldgo back out of the way.
Before you close the door,
be sure the belt isout of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt
in a crash. For
pregnant women, asfor anyone, the key to making
safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly.
Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt
-- except for one thing. If
you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens,just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has two air bags
-- one air bagfor the
driver and another air bagfor the right front passenger.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
You can be severelyinjured orkilled in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belteven if you
have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from
it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bagsare designed to workwith
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags
are
designed to workonly in moderate tosevere
crashes where the front
of your vehicle hits
something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all
in rollover, rear, sideor low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyone in your
vehicle should weara
safety beltproperly whether or not
there’s an
air bag for that
person.
--
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position”
earlier
in this section.
I
--
A CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with
great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to
an inflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keep youin position beforeand during a
crash. Always wearyour safety belt, even withair
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
A CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,an
air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. Air bags pluslap-shoulder belts offer
the best protectionfor adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag
CAUTION: (Continued)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CAUTION: (Continued)
=
system is designedfor them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in yourvehicle. To read how, seethe
part of this manual called “Children”and see the
caution labels on the sunvisors
and the right fronl
passenger’s safety belt.
AIR BAG
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electricalsystem for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there
is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in theIndex
for more information.
How the Air Bag System Works
The right front passenger’s air bagis in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag in
isthe middleof the steering wheel.
1-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly
or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on
or near any other air
bag covering.
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed toinflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speedis above the system’s designed
“threshold level.”If your vehicle goes straightinto a
wall that doesn’t moveor deform, the threshold levelis
about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 km/h). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design,
so that
it can be somewhat aboveor below this range.If your
vehicle strikes something that will move
or deform, such
as a parked car,the threshold level willbe higher. The
air bag is not designedto inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
In any particular crash,no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because
of the damage
to a vehicleor because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity,the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicleis in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all partof the air bag modules insidethe
steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the
right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or
the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force
of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motionis not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal collisions.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates,it quickly deflates,so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag
module -- the steering wheel hubfor the driver’s
air bag, or the instrumentpanel for the right front
passenger’s bag-- will be hot for a short time.The
parts of the bag that come into contact withyou may
be warm, but not toohot to touch.There will be some
smoke and dustcoming from vents in the deflated air
bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver
from
seeing orfrom being able to steer the vehicle, nor does
it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an air bag inflates, there
is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to doso.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh airby opening a window or door.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are brokenby vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them,the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts.The service manualfor your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
0
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing
and diagnostic module, which records information
about the air bag system.
The module records
information about the readiness
of the system,
when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety
belt usage at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air
bag system. Improper service
can mean that your
air bag system won’t work properly.
See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the
right frontpassenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly.You may have to replace the
air
bag module in the steering
wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right frontpassenger’s air bag. Do not openor
break the air bag
coverings.
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water -- such as
water upto the carpeting or higher -- or if water enters
your vehicle and soaks the carpet,
the air bag controller
can be soaked and ruined.If this ever happens, and then
you start your vehicle,the damage could make the air
bags inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would haveto
replace the air bagsas well as the sensors and related
parts. If your vehicle is ever in a flood,or if it’s exposed
to water that soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless
repair costs by turningoff the vehicle immediately.
Don’t let anyone start the vehicle, even to tow it, unless
the battery cablesare first disconnected.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are partsof the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle.You don’t want the systemto
inflate while someoneis working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the Monte Carlo Service Manual have
information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag
system. To purchase a service manual,see “Service and
Owner Publications” inthe Index.
For up to10 minutes after the ~gnition
key is
turned off and the batteryis disconnected, an air
bag can still inflate during improper
service. You
can be injured
if you are close to an air bag
when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. Theyare
probably partof the air bagsystem. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for
you is qualified
to do so.
~~
~
~
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle hasa front split seat and a rear bench
seat, someonecan sit in the center positions.
When you sit in a center seating position,you have a lap
safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plateand pull it along the belt.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Buckle, position and release
it the same way asthe lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’tlong enough,
see “Safety BeltExtender” at theend of this section.
Make surethe release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s veryimportant for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in the rear
seat are hurt more often
in crashes than those who
are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety beltedcan be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash.
And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
To make the belt shorter,pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
1-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear
one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you.
Don’t letit get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock you
if pull the belt across
you very quickly.If this happens, letthe belt go back
slightly to unlockit. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate intothe buckle untilit clicks.
it is secure.
Pull upon the latch plate to make sure
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When the shoulder beltis pulled out all theway, it
will lock. If it does, let it goback all theway and
start again. If the belt is not long enough,see “Safety
Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Makesure
the release buttonon the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips,just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under
it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder
part.
1-29
~.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
-
I..-
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stopor a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out
of the retractor.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash,
you would move forward
too much, which could increase iniurv. The
To unlatch the belt, just push the buttonon the buckle.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for children whohave outgrown
child restraints andfor small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat.To provide added safety beltcomfort for
children whohave outgrown child restraints andfor
smaller adults, thecomfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how toinstall a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-31
-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
.
~
-
I
2. Slide the guide under andpast the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges
of the belt
into the slotsof the guide.
1-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Be sure thatthe belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
Children
Everyone in a vehicleneeds protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size.
Neither
the distance traveled northe age and sizeof the traveler
changes the need,for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the lawin every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says childrenup to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Childrenand Babies
4. Buckle, position and releasethe safety belt as
described in“Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions’’
earlier in this section. Make sure that theshoulder
belt crossesthe shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt
edges together so that you can take them out from the
guides. hll the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and
clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior
body, leaving only the loopof elastic cord exposed.
Children who are up against, or very close to,an
air bag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. Air bags pluslap-shoulder belts offer
the best protectionfor adults and older children,
but not for young childrenand infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air bag
system is designedfor them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly inyour vehicle.
1-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraintwill say whether itis
the right type andsize for yourchild. A very
young child’s hip bonesare so small thata
regular belt might not stay
low on the hips, asit
should. Instead, the belt
will likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply
force right on the
child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries.So, be sure that
any child small enoughfor one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
1-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Infants need complete support, including support
for the
head and neck. Thisis necessary becausean infant’s
neck is weak andits head weighs so much compared
with the restof its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settlesinto the restraint,so the
crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
A baby
should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that many hospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant
to its parents unless thereis an
infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.
at only 25 mph (40
km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly becomea 240-1b. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby
would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in
an infant restraint.
I
I
Never holda baby in your arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will becomeso
heavy youcan’t hold it.
For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they shouldhave protection providedby
appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four
basic types. When selectinga child restraint,
take into consideration notonly the child’s weight
and size, but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which
it
will be used.
An infant car bed (A) isa special bed madefor use
in a motor vehicle. It’san infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position
a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure thatthe infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A rear-facing infant restraint(B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need ina
crash. Some infant seats come in two parts -- the
base stays secured in the vehicle andthe seat part
is removable.
1-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help protect
children who are fkom 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and
about 26 to40 inches (66to 102 cm)in height., or up
to around four yearsof age. One type, a convertible
restraint, is designedto be used either as a rear-facing
infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.
1-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about
four to eight yearsof age. It’s designed to improve
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help
a child to see
out the window.
1-39
-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When choosing a child restraint,be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle.
If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat.We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat.
Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the
front passenger seat. Here’s why:
Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint.You
may find these instructions on the restraint itself
or in a
booklet, or both.These restraints use the beltsystem in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to helpreduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions thatcome with the infant or child
restraint will show you how do
to that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important, A child ina rearfacing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
bag inflates. This is because the back
of a
replacement copyfrom the manufacturer.
rearfacing child restraint would be very closeto
the inflatingair bag. Always secure a rearfacing
child restraint in therear seat.
You may, however, secure a forward-facing child
restraint in theright front seat. Beforeyou secure
a forward-facing childrestraint, always movethe
front passenger seat asfar back asit will go. Or,
secure the childrestraint in therear seat.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Top Strap
A child ina child restraint in the center front seat
can be badlyinjured by the right front passenger
air bag if it inflates. Neversecure a child restraint
in the center front seat. It’s alwaysbetter to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat. You may,
however, secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front passenger seat,but only with
the seat moved all the way back.
Wherever you install it, be sure to securethe child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move
around in a collision orsudden stop and injurepeople in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child
restraint inyour vehicle -- even when no childis in it.
If your child restrainthas a topstrap, it should be
anchored. If you need tohave an anchor installed, you
can ask your Chevrolet dealer toput it in for you. If you
want to install ananchor yourself, your dealercan tell
you how to do it.
Canadian law requires that child restraints
have a top
strap, and that the strap be anchored.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If your child restraint has a top strap, your dealer
can
obtain akit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designedfor this vehicle.The
dealer can then install the anchor
for you. In Canada,
this work will be done for you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using the instructions
provided in the kit.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes
in front of the child’sface or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
Securing aChild Restraint ina Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
I. Put the restraint on the seat.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever hadto.
I
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt allthe way out of
the retractorto set the lock.
back into
5 . To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt
the retractor while you push down the
on child
restraint. If you’re using aforward-facing child
restraint, you may findit helpful to use your
knee
to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten
the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions tobe sure it is secure.
~
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1-43
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt andlet itgo back all theway. The safety belt
will move freely again andbe ready to workfor an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint inthe Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt.
Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure
the child in the child restraint
when and as the
instructions say.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A child ina child restraint in the center front seat
can be badlyinjured by the right front passenger
air bag if it inflates. Never secure
a child restraint
in the center front seat. It’s alwaysbetter to
secure a child restraint in therear seat. You may,
however, secure a forward-facing childrestraint
in theright front passenger seat,but only with
the seat moved all theway back.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pullingit along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull itsfree end while you push
down on the child restraint.
If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions tobe sure it is secure.
1
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready
to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraintin the Right
Front Seat Position
A child in a rear-facing child restraint be
can
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of a
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You’ll be usingthe lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strapif the child restrainthas one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that
came with the child
restraint. Secure the childin the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
Never
1. Because your vehicle hasa right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
as far back as it willgo
before securing aforward-facing child restraint.(See
“Seats” in theIndex.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If the shoulder belt goesin front of the child's face or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
~
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractorto set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you wouldbe able tounbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Larger Children
k
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
directions to be sure
it is secure.
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide.
safety belt and let go
it back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult
or larger child passenger.
1-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrownout
in a crash.
0
Children who aren’t buckled upcan strike other
people who are.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Never do this.
Here two childrenare wearing the samebelt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
@
What if a childis wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but thechild is so small that the shoulder
belt is
very close to thechild’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt stillis on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If
the child isso small that the shoulder beltis still
very close to the child’sface or neck, you might
want to place the child
in the centerseat position,
the one that has only
a lap belt.
I
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in
a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt,but the shoulderpart is behind
the child.If the child wears the belt
in this way, in
a crash the child might slide
under the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen.That could cause seriousor
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the
lap portion of the belt
should beworn low andsnug on the hips,just touching
the child’s thighs.This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt willfasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’tlong enough to fasten, your
dealer willorder you an extender. It’sfree. When you go
in to orderit, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seatin your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit.To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that mightkeep a safety beltsystem from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash,do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would ifbeworn
during a more severe crash, then
you need new belts.
If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will needto have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs
may be necessary evenif the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part onthe air bagsystem earlier
in this section.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. Theycan rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bagcovers, and
have them repaired or replaced.(The air bag system
does not need regularmaintenance.)
1-51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
@% NOTES
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0 Section 2
FeaturesandControls
Here youcan learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and informationon starting,
shifting and braking.Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything
is
working properly -- and whatto do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-5
2-8
2-9
2- 10
2- 12
2- 13
2- 16
2- 18
2-22
2-23
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-27
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry(If Equipped)
Trunk
Theft
[email protected]
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater(If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-35
2-36
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-4 1
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-44
2-46
2-48
Power Windows
Horn
Tilt Steering Wheel
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Lighter
Sun Visors
Auxiliary Power Connection
Sunroof (Option)
OnStar System (Option)
Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Keys
A CAT
TON:
Leaving young children in
a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous
for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys ina vehicle with young children.
2-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The ignition keyis for the
When a newvehcle is delivered, the dealer removes
the plugsfrom the door keys and gives them to the
first owner.
The ignition keys don’t have plugs. Your dealer or
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance has thecode for
your keys.
The door key isfor the
The door key does have a plug.The plug has a code on
it that tells your dealer
or a qualified locksmith how
to
make extradoor keys. Keep the plugsin a safe place.If
you lose your door keys, you’ll be ablehave
to new ones
made easily using these plugs.
If you needa new ignition key, contactyour dealer who
can obtain the correct key code, in
or,an emergency, call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that
a lot
can help prevent theft. But you can have
of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside. You may even have to
damage your vehicle to get in.
So be sure you
have extra keys.
-~
2-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall
out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders caneasily enter through an
unlocked
door when you slow down or stop yourvehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown outof the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’tlocked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and
you will be far
better off whenever you drive yourvehicle.
--
--
There are several ways to
lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your
door key or remote keyless
entry transmitterif your vehicle has this option.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
From the inside, push the lever on the left (shown above)
the lever.
to lock the door manually. To unlock, pull
Power Door Locks
Press the power door lock switch on the right (shown
above) to lock or unlock both doors.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open
your
door and set the locksfrom inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
If your vehiclehas this option,you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away using theremote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry transmitter operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause
undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operationof
the device.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice decrease
a
in
range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry
system. If the transmitterdoes not work orif you have
to stand closer toyour vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
0
Check to determine if battery replacement or
transmitter resynchronization is necessary.See the
instructions that follow.
0
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy
or snowy weather.
0
Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be
blocking the signal. Take afew steps to the leftor
right, hold the transmitter higher,and try again.
0
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technicianfor service.
Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
Operation
Press UNLOCK once to
unlock the driver’s door.
Press UNLOCK again
within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors.
Pressing UNLOCK will
also cause the vehicle’s
interior lamps tocome
on for a periodof time.
(See “Sustained Interior
Illumination” in the Index
for more details).
To lock both doors, press LOCK.
To unlock the trunk,
press the trunksymbol on the transmitter.The trunk
will only unlock if your transaxle
is in PARK (P);
pressing LOCK or the trunk symbol will also cause the
vehicle’s interior lamps to come on
for a periodof time.
(See “Sustained Interior Illumination” in the
Index
for more details).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Each remote keyless entry transmitter
is coded to
prevent another transmitterfrom unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can
be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you
go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery
in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak
if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably timeto change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfacesmay damage the
transmitter.
For battery replacement,use type CR2032 or
an equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a flat objectlike a dime into the sloton the
back of the transmitter. Gently pry apart the front
and back.
2. Remove the battery and replaceit with the new one,
making sure the positive(+) side of the battery is
facing down.
2-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Snap the top and bottom together;make sure the
halves are together tightlyso water won’t get in.
4. Test the operation of your transmitter with your
vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try
synchronizingthe transmitter with your receiver,
(located in your vehicle).
Synchronization
Synchronizationmay be necessary due to the security
method used by thisremote keyless entry system.
The transmitter does not send the same signal twice
to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a
signal it has previously beensent; this prevents
someone from recording and playing back the signal
from the transmitter.
To resynchronize the transmitter with the receiver,
do
the following:While standing closeto your vehicle,
simultaneously pressand hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons onthe transmitter for about five seconds. The
door locks should cycle (lock
and unlock) toconfirm
synchronization. If the locksdo not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Trunk
A CAUTION:
- -
It can be dangerous to drive withtrunk
the lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t seeor smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.
If you must drive withthe trunk lid openor if
electrical wiringor other cable connections must
pass through the seal
between the body and the
trunk lid:
Make sure all windowsare shut.
Turn thefan on your heatingor cooling
with the setting
system to its highest speed
on VENT. That will force outsideair into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls’’ in
the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them
all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust”in the Index.
Trunk Lock
Theft
To unlock the trunkfrom the outside, insert the door key
and turn it.You can alsouse the remote keyless entry
function if your vehiclehas this option. Just press the
trunk symbol on the transmitter, making sure your shift
lever is in PARK (P).
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number
of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put
on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Remote Trunk Release (Option)
Key in the Ignition
Press the button under
the instrument panel on
the driver’s side.Your
transaxle shift lever must
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy targetfor joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear achime reminding youto remove your key
from the ignition andtake it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and
so will your
ignition and transaxle. And remember
to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Remember, your trunkcan be opened at any time using
this lock release,so be sure to lock your doors.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember tokeep your valuables outof sight.
Put them in a storage area,
or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you parkin a lot where someonewill be watching
your vehicle, it’s best lock
to it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to
leave your ignitionkey?
a If possible, park in a busy,
well lit area.
0
Put your valuables in
a storage area, like your
trunk or glove box.Be sure to close andlock the
storage area.
0
Close all windows.
a Lock the glove box.
a Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0
and remote keyless entry
Then take the door key
transmitter with you.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
[email protected]
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key I1
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key 11is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when you insert
or remove the key from
the ignition.
PASS-Key 11uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key
that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-Key11system senses that someone
is
using the wrong key,
it shuts down the vehicle’s starter
and fuel systems.For about three minutes, the starter
won’t work and fuel won’t
go to the engine. If someone
tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key
during this time,the vehicle will not start.
This
discourages someonefrom randomly trying different
keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to
make a match.
The ignition key mustbe clean and dry before it’s
inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start. If the
engine does not start andthe SECURITY light ison, the
key may be dirtyor wet. Turn the ignition off.
Clean and dry the key. Wait
about three minutes and try
again. The SECURITY light may remain on during this
time. If the starter still won’t work, and the key
appears
to be clean and dry, wait about three
minutes and try
another ignition key. At this time, youmay also want to
check the fuses (see “Fuses and CircuitBreakers” in the
Index). If the starter won’t work withthe other key, your
vehicle needs service.If your vehicle does start, the first
ignition key may be faulty.
See your dealer or a
locksmith who can servicethe PASS-Key 11.
If you accidentallyuse a key thathas a damaged or
missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work
and the
SECURITY light willcome on. But you don’t have to
wait threeminutes before trying another ignition key.
See your dealeror a locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key 11to have a new key made.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light
comes
on and stayson, you will beable to restart yourengine
if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key I1 system, however,
is not working properly and must
be serviced by
your dealer.Your vehicle is not protectedby the
PASS-Key I1 system.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key I1 ignition key, see
your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-KeyI1
to have a new key made. In an emergency, call the
Chevrolet Roadside AssistanceCenter at
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872). In Canada, call
1-800-268-6800.
1
1
New Vehicle SS13reak-In”
Ignition Positions
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
‘6break-in.” But it will perform betterin the long
run if you followthese guidelines:
0 Don’t drive at anyone speed
fast or
slow for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
I 0 Avoid making hard stops for thefirst
200 miles (322 km) or so. During thistime
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.See
“Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for more
information.
--
--
I
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A
E
W
With the ignition keyin the ignition switch, you
can turn
the switch tofive positions:
ACC (A): The accessory position lets you use things
like theradio and windshield wipers when
the engine is
off. To use ACC, push inthe key and turn it toward you.
Your steering wheelwill stay locked.
LOCK (B): Before you put the keyinto the ignition
switch, the switch is in LOCK. It’s also the only position
in which you can remove your key.This position locks
your ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a
theft-deterrent feature.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’tlock the steering
wheel. Use OFF if you musthave your vehicle pushed
or towed.
RUN (D): This position is where the key returns
after youstart your vehicle. With theengine off, you
can use RUN to display some of your warning and
indicator lights.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
A warning chime will sound if you open
the driver’s
door when the ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACC and
the keyis in the ignition.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTICE:
If your key seemsstuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all theway in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel leftand right while youturn the
key hard. But turn the key only withyour hand.
Using a tool to force it could
break the key or the
ignition switch.If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.
Starting Your 3100 Engine
Move your shift lever toPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position-- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re alreadymoving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your Chevrolet
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift toPARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine getswarn.
1 NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a timewill cause your battery to be
drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your startermotor.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2. If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way
to the
floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in
START forup to 15 seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
I NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to workwith the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates.Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might notperform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual thattells how to doit
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Starting Your 3800 Series I1 Engine
Move your shift lever toPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position-- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Chevrolet
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK(P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START for about three to five seconds at atime until
your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try to help avoid draining your battery
or
damaging your starter.
3. If your engine won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your acceleratorpedal all theway to the
floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again,do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine.
After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal
starting procedure.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to workwith the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates.Before adding electrical
equipment, check withyour dealer. If you don’t,
your engine mightnot performproperly.
If you ever haveto have yourvehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that
tells how to do it
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
In very cold weather,0°F (- 18O C ) or colder, the engine
coolant heatercan help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged
in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cordas it was before tokeep it
away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it
could be damaged.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood andunwrap the electrical cord.The
cord is located behind the vehicle’s
passenger side
headlamp fixture.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
I
I
I
I‘
CAUTIO:
B
B
How long shouldyou keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have,and some other things. Insteadof
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll
be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can giveyou the best advice for
that particular area.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
2-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle mayhave a shift lever on the
steering columnor on the console between the seats.
Maximum engine speedis limited on automatic
transaxle vehicles, when you’rein PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline components
from improper operation.
There are several different positionsfor your shift lever.
PARK (P): This locks your front wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have leftthe
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever toPARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in theIndex. If
you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a Trailer’’ in
the Index.
Make sure the shift leveris fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine.Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock.You must fully apply your regular brakes
before you canshift from PARK (P) when the ignition is
in RUN. If you cannot shift outof PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever by
pushing it all theway into
PARK (P) while keeping the brake pedal pushed down.
Release the shift lever button
if you have a console shift.
Then move theshift lever outof PARK (P), being sure to
press the shift lever buttonif you have a console shift.
See “Shifting Outof PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R):Use this gear to back up.
N
)OTICE:
Shifting toREVERSE (R)while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift toREVERSE (R)only after yourvehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicleback and forth to getout of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NEUTRAL (N):In this position, yourengine doesn’t
connect with the wheels.To restart whenyou’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicleis being towed.
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAI .N)
while your engineis “racing” (runningat high
speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engineis racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused
by shifting out
of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine
racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@): This positionis
for normal driving.If you need more powerfor passing,
DRIVE (D);This position is also used for normal
driving, but itoffers more powerand lower fuel
and you’re:
economy than AUTOMATICOVERDRIVE(@).
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Here are some timesyou might chooseDRIVE (D)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(@):
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal allthe way down.
0
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
0
When towing a trailer,so there is less shifting
between gears.
0
When going down a steep hill.
You’ll shift downto the next gear and have
more power.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly, or
if it seems not to shift gears asyou go faster,
something may be wrong with your transaxle;
your vehicle may default to SECOND
(2).
However if you drive veryfar thatway, your
vehicle can be damaged. So if this happens, have
your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,you
can use SECOND (2)when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 k m k ) and AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE(@)for higherspeeds.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
FIRST (1): This position gives you evenmore power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or indeep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (l), the transaxle won’t shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowenough.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want
to use
your brakes off and on.
I
I NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND(2) for more than
25 miles (41 km) at speeds over55 mph
(90 km/h),or you can damage your transaxle.
Use DRIVE (D) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE(@)as much as possible.
Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are
going slowerthan 65 mph (105 km/h), or you
can damage your engine.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1
NOTICE:
~
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’ttry to
drive. This might happen if you werestuck in
very deepsand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehiclethere with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat
and damage the
transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P)
to hold your vehicle in position aon
hill.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot. Push down the
parking brake pedal with
your left foot.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake
on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.You may haveto
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towinga trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer
from moving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push
the parking
brake pedal with your left foot. When
you lift your left
foot, the parkingbrake pedal will follow it to the
released position.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Shifting Into PARK (P)
L,!”
C WTION:
It can be dangerous to
get out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P)with the
~
Column Shift
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right
foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift leverinto the PARK (P) position
like this:
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others couldbe injured.
To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
0
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Pull the lever toward you.
Console Shift
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)position
like this:
0
c
w
Hold in the button on the
lever and push the lever
all the way toward the
front of your vehicle.
Move the lever upas far as it will go.
3. Move the ignition keyto LOCK.
4. Remove the key andtake it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with
the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle withthe ignition key in your
hand, your vehicleis in PARK (P).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Torque Lock
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
r
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you
, leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
’ overheat and even catch fire.You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the
engine running unless you have
to.
I
If you have to leave your vehicle withthe engine
running, be sure your vehicleis in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After
you’ve moved the shft lever into the PARK (P)
position, hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then,
see if you canmove the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P)
without first pulling it toward you (or,if you have the
console shift lever,without first pushing the button). If
you can, it means thatthe shift lever wasn’t fully locked
into PARK (P).
If you are parkingon a hill andyou don’t shift your
transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weightof the
vehicle may put too muchforce on the parkingpawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift
lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in
the Index.
When you are readyto drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you
may need to have another
vehicle pushyours a little uphill to takesome of the
pressure from the parlung pawlin the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P).
2-25
~
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
.-
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock.You
must fully apply your regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition isin RUN.See
“Automatic Transaxle Operation”in the Index.
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing
it all the way into PARK (P)
while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Release the
shift lever button if you have a console shift. Then move
the shift lever out of PARK
(P), being sure to press the
shift lever button if you
have a console shift.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift outof PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of
Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixedas soon as you can.
I
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
2-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
-
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with theengine running. Butif you
ever have to, here are some things to
know.
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaustcoming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in acollision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on theroad orover road debris.
0 Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaustsystem had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out anyCO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if
the fan switchis at the highestsetting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park ina
garage with the enginerunning.
Another closed-in placecan bea blizzard. (See
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
--
Power Windows
I
It canbe dangerous toget out of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fullyin PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured.
To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and
if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Switches on the driver’s door armrest control each
of the
windows when the ignition
is on or in ACC. In addition,
the passenger’sdoor has a switchfor its own window.
The driver’s window switch has an auto-down feature.
This switchis labeled AUTO. Tap the bottom
of the
switch, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. If the bottom of the switch is pressed all the
way down, the window willgo all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the top
of
the switch, To raise the window, press and hold the top
of the switch.
Turn SignaYMultifunction Lever
Horn
Press on or along the topedge of your steering wheel
horn symbols to sound the horn.
Tilt Steering Wheel
I
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjustthe steering
wheel before you drive.
You can also raiseit to the
highest level to give your
legs more room when you
exit and enterthe vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever as shown. Move the steering wheel to a
comfortable level, then release thelever to lockthe
wheel in place.
0
Headlamp HighLow Beam
0
WindshieldWipers
0
WindshieldWasher
0
Cruise Control (Option)
2-29
.-
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
n r n Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions.
These positions allow
you to signal a turn or
a lane change.
To signal a turn, movethe lever all the wayup or down.
When the turnis finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
To signal a lane change,
just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold
it there untilyou
complete your lane change.The lever will return by
itself when you release
it.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
As you signal a turn or a lane
change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned
out and other drivers won’t
see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid
an
accident. If the arrows don’tgo on at all when you
signal a turn, check
for burned-out bulbs andcheck the
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index).
Headlamp High/Low Beam
To change your headlamps
from low beam to high
beam, or high to low, pull
the multifunction lever all
the way toward you. Then
release it.
When the high beams areon, a lighton the instrument
panel also willbe on.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield
wipers by turningthe band
marked WIPER. For a
single wiping cycle, turnthe
band to MIST. Holdit there
until the wipers start,then
let go. The wipers will stop
after one cycle. ~f
you want
more cycles, hold the band
on MIST longer.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the bandLO.
to For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further, HI.
to To stop
the wipers, turn the band to
OFF.
You can set the wiperspeed for a long or short delay
between wipes.This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turnthe band to choose the delay time. The
closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
Heavy snow orice can overload your wipers.A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools.
Clear away
snow or ice to preventan overload.
Windshield Washer
At the topof the multifunction lever, there’s paddle
a
with the word PUSH onit. To spray washer fluidon
the windshield, pushthe paddle. The wipers willrun
for several sweeps and then either stop
or return to
your preset speed.
I - -
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.If they’re frozento the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades orblade inserts.
2-31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you
can’t drivesafely at a steadyspeed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on
winding
roads orin heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
needless wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
Setting Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed
of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator.This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about
25 mph (40 kmk).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
shuts off.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If you leave your cruise control switch
on when
you’re not using cruise,you might hit a button
and go into cruisewhen you don’t want to. You
could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch
off until you want touse it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control ata desired speed
and then you apply the brake.This shuts off the cruise
control, but youdon't need to reset it to resume your
previous speed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways togo to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to thehigher speed.
Push the SET button at the endof the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You'll
now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switchfrom ON to WA. Hold it
there until you getup to the speed you want, then
release the switch.(To increase your speedin
very small amounts, move the switch toFUA.
Each time you do this, your vehicle willgo about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
The accelerate feature will only work after you set the
cruise control speedby pushing the SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
There are two ways to turnoff h e cruise control:
Push in theSET button until you reach thelower
speed you want, then release
it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET
button for less than half a second. Each
time you do
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
Passing Another VehicleWhile Using Cruise Control
Use the acceleratorpedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down tothe cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work
on hills depends
upon your speed, load and
the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you
may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to
brake or shift toa lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying thebrake
takes you outof cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Step lightly on the brake pedal; OR
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
When you turnoff the cruise control or the ignition,
or shift intoPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), your cruise
control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
CourtesyLamps
pf Turn the knob to this symbol (B) to turn on
the parking and other operatinglamps without
the headlamps.
-',a-Turn
the knob to this symbol (C) to turn on
the headlamps and other operating lamps.
#
Turn the knob toOFF to turn off the lamps.
A warning chime will sound when you turn the ignition
switch to OFF, LOCK or ACC with the lampson.
Daytime Running Lamps / Automatic
Headlamp Control
The lamp controls are on the instrument panel. They
control these systems:
Headlamps
Taillamps
ParkingLamps
0
LicenseLamps
0
SidemarkerLamps
Daytime Running Lamps( D m ) Cafi make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they canbe especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
A light sensor ontop of the instrument panel makes
the DRL work, so be sure it isn't covered.
2-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The DRL systemwill make your high-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when:
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
The ignition is on,
You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lamps by
moving the dial (located next to the headlamp switch.)
See “Exterior Lamps” text earlier in this section.
If you turn the dial all the way up, your courtesy
or
interior lamps willcome on.
The headlamp switch is off and
0
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your reduced intensity
high-beam headlamps willbe on. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps won’t
be on. Your
instrument panel won’tbe lit up either.
Courtesy Lamps
When any dooris opened, several lamps come on. These
lamps are courtesy lamps. They make
it easy for you to
enter and leave your vehicle.
You can also turn these
lamps on by moving the dial near the headlamp
knob all
the way up.
When it’s dark enough outside, your
DRL will turnoff
and your low-beam headlamps will turn on.
The other
lamps that comeon with your headlamps will also
come on.
When it’s bright enough outside, the low-beam
headlamps willgo out and DRL turns on your
high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity.
Some of the lamps have switchesso you can turn them
on, even when the doors
are closed. These lampsare
reading lamps.To avoid draining your battery, be sure
to turnoff all reading lamps when leaving your vehicle.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL
off, set the parking
brake while the ignitionis in OFF or LOCK. Then start
your vehicle.The DRL will stayoff until you release
the parking brake.
As with any, vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need
it.
2-36
.. .
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Interior Lamps
Sustained .Interior Illumination
Your courtesy lamps will come on and stay onfor a set
time whenever you:
slowly dim during the delay time until theygo out. The
delay time is canceled if you turn the ignition key to
RUN or START, so the lamps will go out right away.
Open a door.
When theignition is on, sustainedinterior illumination is
inactive, which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on.
0
Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
Rearview Mirror Reading Lamps
0
Press LOCK onthe remote keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped).
Press the trunk symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter (if equipped).
If you open a door, thelamps will stay onwhile it’s
open and then turn off automatically about 18 seconds
after you closeit. If you don’topen a door, the lamps
will turnoff after about 18 seconds, unless you press
UNLOCK or thetrunk symbol on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.If you press UNLOCK or
the trunk
symbol and don’topen a door, the lamps will turnoff
after about 55 seconds. If you pressLOCK on the
remote keyless entry transmitter,the lamps will turnoff
about 17 seconds after all doors are closed.
Sustained interior illumination includes afeature called
theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps don’t
just turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead, they
These lamps go on when you openthe doors. When
the doors are closed, turn thelamps on and off with
the switches.
2-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Battery Saver
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the
courtesy lampson. If you leave the dial turned all the
way up, or if you leave door
a open, the lamps will
automatically turnoff after 10 minutes if the ignition
is off.
You can adjustthe mirror for day or night driving. Press
the tab forward (away from you)
for day driving. Pull
the tab back (toward you)for night driving.
This feature will not turnoff the reading lamps, only
the lamps controlled bythe dial. Be sure to turnoff
any reading lamps using the switch before you leave
the vehicle.
Mirrors
Adjust all the mirrorsso you can see clearly when you
are sitting in acomfortable driving position.
2-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Power Outside Mirrors
The power mirror control is
on the driver’s door. Turn
the control tothe left to
adjust the left mirror
or to
the right to adjustthe right
mirror. Then move the
control in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
-
~~
-~
:x Outside Mirror
Storage Armrest
your passenger’sside mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane,
you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Use the door key to lock and unlock theglove box. To
open, lift the latch.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
To use the storage area,
fold down the armrest.
Press the latch onthe
front edge of the armrest
and pull up.To use the
cupholder, flip it forward.
I
Instrument Panel Cupholder
To use this cupholder,
slide it outof the
instrument panel. It
is located underneath
your audio system.
Door Storage Compartments
Convenience Net (Op I I)
Each of the doors hasa storage compartment.
Your vehicle may havea convenience net. You’ll seeit
just inside the back wall
of the trunk.
Center Console
~
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the It
net.
can
help keep them from falling over during sharp turns
or
quick starts and stops.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the
trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the netso that it will lie flat when
you’re not usingit.
Ashtrays and Lighter
The center front ashtray may be on the instrument panel
or on the console.To remove the instrument panel
ashtray, open it, push down on the locking tab and pull
out the ashtray.
To open the storage area, press the button located on
the left frontedge of the storage door and lift the cover.
The console has a cassette and
CD storage bin and a
cupholder. To use the cupholderfor large cups, remove
the insert.
2-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle may have a rear ashtray.It is located within
a small door at the rear of your console. Push on the
right side of the door.The ashtray will then rotateto the
right for usage. You can only access the ashtray by
pushing on the door’s right side.
To remove the rear
ashtray, push down on the snuffer located in the middle
of the ashtray and liftit out.
I
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn
into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettesor
other smoking materials could set them on fire,
causing damage.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror. For the
driver’s mirror, slide thecover to the side.For the
passenger’s mirror,lift the cover. The lamps will come
on whenyou open the coveron the passenger’s visor.
Floor Mats (Option)
To use the lighter, just push it inall the way and let go.
When it’s ready,it will popback by itself.
NOTICE:
Don’t holda cigarette lighterin with yourhand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can make it overheat, damagingthe
lighter and the heating element.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also move them from side to side.
h
View A
View B
Installation
1. Move the driver’s seat toits most rearward position.
2. Locate the driver’s side floor mat in the vehicle with
the rearof the mat against the left (outboard) front
edge of the seat track mounting bracket (see view
A).
2-41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Use a screwdriver to screw the locator post
into the
vehicle’s carpeting. Press down while turning to
allow the locator “auger point” to pierce the floor
carpet. The locator will not screw down tightly, but
will rotate freely when installed properly.
Usage
1. To remove the mat, pullup on the rearof the mat to
unsnap itfrom the locator post (see view
B).
2. To re-install the mat, alignthe grommet in the mat
over the locator post and push downsnap
to the mat
into place (see view
B).
Auxiliary Power Connection
Your vehicle is equipped
with auxiliary power leads.
These leads canbe used
to power aftermarket
electrical equipment
added to your vehicle.
2-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
They are located onthe passenger’s sideof the vehicle,
below the glove box and behind what
is referred to as a
“hush panel.”For additional informationon accessing
these leads and electrical hookup, please refer to a
service manual.To order a service manual, see “Service
Publications Ordering”in the Index.
NOTICE:
Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle
can damageit or keep other things from working
as they should.This wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment and never use anything that
exceeds the fuse rating.
I
Sunroof (Option)
OnStar System (Option)
This system may beobtained from your dealer.The
following services are available 24 hours a day:
Roadside Service with Location
0
Emergency Services Button
Remote Door Unlock
Theft DetectiodNotification of Air Bag Deployment
Customer Convenience Services
For more information, contact your dealer.
Cellular Telephone (Option)
Your sunroof includesa sliding glass panel anda sliding
sunshade. The switch is located between the sun visors
just ahead of the sunroof and works only when the
ignition is on.
To open the glass paneland sunshade, press the rearof
the switch, (OPEN). Let go of the switch to stop the
panel in any position.Press the front of the switch,
(CLOSE), to close the glass panel.The sunshade can
only be closed by hand.
The sunroof glasspanel cannot be opened or closedif
your vehiclehas an electrical failure.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle is prewiredfor dealer installation
of a fixed mobile or portablehand-held cellular
telephone. For more information, see your dealer.
Instrument Panel -- Your Information System
I
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
\
\
A. Vents
E. Audio System
B. Instrument Cluster
E Ashtray and Lighter
C. Climate ControlsRear Defogger
G. Remote Trunk Release
D. Glove Box
H. Lamp Controls
2-45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Instrument Panel Cluster
Standard Cluster: United States Version
Shown, Canadian Similar
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know
at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, about how much fuel is in your
tank and many other things you need to drive safely
and economically.
Trip Odometer
Your trip odometer tells howfar you have driven since
you last resetit, To set it to zero, press the reset button.
Tachometer
Speedometer/Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph)and kilometers per hour (kmh).
Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven
in
either miles (usedin the United States) or in kilometers
(used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.If you see
silver lines between thenumbers, you’ll know someone
has probablytampered with it and the numbersmay not
be correct.
You may wonder whathappens if your vehicle needsa
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then thatis what will
be done.If it can’t, thenit will be set at zero and
a label
must be put on the driver’s door to show the oldmileage
reading when the newodometer was installed.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
\
4
k6
RPM
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
c
‘-+El
0
-7
1” Q
Q
x 1000
NOTICE:
~~
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red area, or engine damage may occur.
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle.The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repairor replacement. Paying attentionto
your warning lights and gages could also
save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may or
be is a
problem with oneof your vehicle’s functions.As you
will see in the detailson the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when
you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working.
If you are
familiar with this section, you should not
be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may beisora problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together
to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting todo repairs canbe costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the keyis turned to RUN or START, a chime
will come on for about eight seconds to remind people
to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety
belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
will also come on and
stay on until the driver’s
belt is buckled.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there an
is electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors,
the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module.For more information on the
air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
AIR BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flashfor a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays
on after you start the
engine or comes on when youare driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readinesslight should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the
light doesn’tcome on then,have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there is a problem.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Charging System Light
VOLTS
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition, as
a check to show you it’s
working. Then it should
go out.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the charging system.
It could
indicate that you havea loose drive beltor another
electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving
while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drivea short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio
and air conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system
is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part
can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you
need both parts working well.
If the warning lightcomes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have yourbrake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
This light shouldcome on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key toRUN. If it
doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif
there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice thatthe pedal is
harder to push. Or,the pedal maygo closer to thefloor.
It may take longer to stop. If
the light is still on,or if the
anti-lock brake system warning lightis flashing, have
the vehicle towedfor service. (See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” and “Towing Your Vehicle” in
the Index.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident.If the lightis still on or if the
anti-lock brake system warning light is flashing
after you’ve pulledoff the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
*Whenthe ignitionis on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when
you set your parking brake.The
light will stay onif your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. Ifit stays on after your parking brake
is fully
released, it meansyou have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Light
ANTI LOCK
-
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine and it will
stay on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light flashes when you’re driving, you don’t have
anti-lock brakes and there could
be a problem with your
regular brakes. Pull off the road and
stop carefully. You
may notice thatthe pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal
may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.
Have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index.)
Your regular brake system may not be working
properly if the anti-lock brake system warning
light is flashing. Driving with the anti-lock
brake system warning light flashing can lead
to an accident. After you’ve pulled
off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
If the anti-lock brake system warning
light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on
when you’re driving,stop as soonas possible and turn
the ignition off.Then start theengine again to reset the
system. If the light still stayson, or comes on again
while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service.
If the
light ison but not flashing and the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still
have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when youturn the ignition key toRUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there is a problem.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Anti-Lock Brake System Active Light
LOW
TRAC
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
the anti-lock brake system
active light will come on.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this light
comes
on, so adjust your driving accordingly.
The light will
stay on for a fewseconds after the system stops
adjusting brake pressure.
The anti-lock brake system active light also comes
on
briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the
light doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
there totell you whenthe system is active.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Engine Coolant Temperature Light
-
HOT
This light tells you that
I
your engine coolant has
overheated or your
radiator
cooling
fan(s)
are not working.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull
off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn
off the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,”
this manual shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
100
\ g p 6 *
You have a gage that shows
the engine coolant
temperature. If the gage
pointer moves into the red
area, yourengine is too hot!
That reading means the same thing as the warning light.
It means that yourengine coolant has overheated.If you
have been operating your vehicle
under normal driving
conditions, you should pull offthe road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the
engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems onthe Road,” this manualshows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Low Coal:-nt Warning Light
1
LOW
COOLANT
If this lightcomes on, your
system is low on coolant
aid the engine may
overheat. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index and
have your vehicle serviced
as soon as youcan.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
NOTICE:
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operationof the
fuel, ignitionand emission
control systems.
This system is calledOBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissionsare at acceptable levelsfor
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there
is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the
system before any problem is apparent.This may
prevent more seriousdamage to your vehicle.This
system is also designed to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, aftera while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not as
be
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on,as a check to show YOU it is
working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not
running. If the light doesn’tcome on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on
during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
0
Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and servicemay be required.
0
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
e Reducing vehicle speed.
0
0
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer,reduce the amountof
cargo being hauled as soonas it is possible.
If the light stops flashing andremains on steady,see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues toflash, when it is safe todo so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restartthe
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following, If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified servicecenter for service.
If the Light IsOn Steady
You may be able to correct theemission system
malfunction by consideringthe following:
Did you recently putfuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, makingsure to fully install
the cap.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has beenleft off or improperly installed.A loose or
missing fuelcap will allow fuel toevaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the
cap properly
installed should turn the light
off.
Did youjust drive througha deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
Have you recentlychanged brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may
go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be
detected by the system and cause the light turn
to on.
If you experience one or moreof these conditions,
at least one
change the fuel brand you use. It will require
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above stepshave made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center
check the
vehicle. Your dealer has theproper test equipment and
diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
2-55
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Oil Warning Light
B
OIL
If you have a problem with
your oil, this light may stay
on afteryou start your
engine, or come on when
you are driving.
This indicates thatoil is not going through your
engine
quickly enough tokeep it lubricated. The engine could
be low onoil or could havesome other oil problem.
Have it fixed right away.
The oil light couldalso come on in two other situations:
0
When the ignitionis on but theengine is not running,
the light will come on
as a test to show you
it is
working, but the light will
go out when you turn the
ignition toSTART. If it doesn’t come on with
the
ignition on, you may have a problem withthe fuse or
bulb. Have it fixed right away.
0
If you make a hard stop, the light may comeforona
moment. This is normal.
2-56
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A CAUTION:
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become
so hot that it
catches fire. You or otherscould beburned.
Check your oil as soonas possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from
neglected oil
problems canbe costly and is not covered by
your warranty.
Change Oil Soon Light
Low Oil Level Light
LOW
OIL
Your engine is equipped
with an oil level monitoring
system. When the ignition
key is turned on, the LOW
OIL light will briefly flash.
If the light does not flash, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn youif there’s a problem.
If the light stays on, stop the vehicle
on a level surface
and turnthe engine off. Check the oil level usingthe
engine oil dipstick. (See “Engine Oil” in the Index.)
If
the light does not flash, have the low oil level sensor
system repairedso it will be ready to warn you
if there’s
a problem.
CHG
OIL
SOON
The CHG OIL SOON light
should come on as a bulb
check when you start the
engine. If this light stayson
for about 20 seconds after
you turn on the ignition,
have the oil changed.
When to change your oil also depends on driving habits
and conditions because they directly affect engine speed,
coolant temperature and vehicle speed. Because
of this,
the CHG OIL SOON light may come on as early as
2,000 miles (3,200 km) or less for harsh conditions.
Remember, after changing your engine oil, the system
must be reset; with the ignition key in RUN,the
but
engine off, fully push and release the accelerator pedal
The oil level monitoring system only checks the oil level three times withinfive seconds. If the CHG OIL SOON
light flashes two times, the system
is reset. Howeverif
during the brief period between key
on and engine
the light comes on and stays
on for five seconds, it did
crank. It does not monitor theengine oil level when the
not reset. You’ll need to reset the system again.
engine is running. Additionally, an oil level check
is
only performedif the engine has been turnedoff for a
considerable period of time, allowing the oil normally in
circulation to drain back into the oil pan.
2-57
~~
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
.
._
Security Light
SECURITY
Fuel Gage
This light willcome on
when you turn the key to
START and stay on until the
vehicle starts.
\
E
Your fuel gage tellsyou
about how much fuel you
have left when the ignition
is on. When the indicator
nears EMPTY (E), you still
have a littlefuel left, but
you should get moresoon.
It will also come on and stay onif your key is too
dirty or wetfor the PASS-Key I1 system to read the
resistor pellet.
If the resistor pellet is damaged
or missing, the light
will flash.
If you’re driving and the
light comes on and remains on,
your PASS-KeyTI system is not working properly.Your
vehicle isnot protected by PASS-Key11, and you should
see your dealer.
Here aresome things owners ask about. All these
situations are normal and
do not show a problem with
your fuel gage:
0
At the service station, the pump shuts
off before the
gage reads FULL(F).
0
It takes a little more or less fuelfill
to up than the
gage indicated. Forexample, the gage may have
indicated the tankwas half full, but it actually took
a little more or
less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill it.
The gage moves alittle when you turn a corner or
speed up.
0
2-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0Section 3
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll findout how to operate thecomfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.Be
sure toread about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Ventilation Tips
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Setting the Clockfor Systems with Automatic
Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette TapePlayer and
Automatic Tone Control
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3-11
3- 15
3-17
3- 17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-20
AM-FM Stereo with CompactDisc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If
Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning with Electronic Controls
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle.
The systems work best if
you keep your windows closed while using them.
Fan Knob
The right knob with the fan symbol selects the force
of
air you want.To turn the fanoff, turn the knob to
“0.”
Temperature Control
If your system does not have the auxiliary temperature
control option, the center knob
changes the temperature
of the air coming through the system.
Turn this knob
toward red (to the right)
for warmer air.Turn it toward
blue (to the left)for cooler air.
If your system does have the auxiliary temperature
control option, the center levers change the temperature
of the air coming through
the system. The DRIV
lever sets the temperature
for the driver and rear seat
passengers, and thePASS lever setsthe temperature
for the front seat passenger.
For maximum defroster
performance, setthe DRIV and PASS levers at
full warm.
3-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Mode Knob
The left knob has several settings to controlthe direction
of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature to a
comfortable setting.
MAX: This setting recirculates much of the air inside
your vehicle andsends it through the instrument panel
outlets. The air conditioningcompressor will run
automatically in this setting unlessthe outside
temperature is below 40°F (4.5 " C ) .(Even when the
compressor is running, you can control the temperature).
N C : This setting bringsin outside air anddirects
it through the instrument panel outlets. The air
conditioning compressor will run automaticallyin
this setting unlessthe outside temperature is below
40°F (4.5"C). (Even when the compressor is running,
you can control the temperature).
+e
+#
BI-LEVEL: This setting brings in the outside air
and directs it two ways. Half ofthe air is directed
through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the
remaining air is directed through the floor ductsand a
little to the defrost and side window vents.The air
conditioning compressor will run automaticallyin this
setting unlessthe outside temperature is below 40°F
(4.5"C). (Even when the compressor is running, you can
control the temperature).
-0
/J VENT This setting brings in'outside air and
+'
directs it through the instrument panel outlets.
0
FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air
through the ductsnear the floor. The rest comes out of
the defrost and side window vents.
we DEFOG: This setting allows halfof the air to
+/J
go to thefloor ducts and half to the defrost and side
window vents. The air conditioningcompressor will
run automatically in this setting unless the outside
temperature is below 40°F (4.5"C). (Even when the
compressor is running, you can control the temperature).
DEFROST This setting directs mostof the air
through the defrost and side window vents. Some of
the air goes to the floor ducts.
The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting unless
the outsidetemperature is below 40°F (4.5"C). (Even
when the compressor is running, you can control the
temperature).
Air Conditioning
On very hot days, open the windows long
enough to let
hot, inside air escape.This reduces the A/C compressor
load, which should help fuel economy.
3-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
For quick cool-down on very hot days, use
MAX with
the temperature control all the way in the blue area.
If
this setting is usedfor long periodsof time, the air in
your veluclemay become too dry.
Ventilation System
For normal cooling on hot days, use A/C with the
temperature control in the blue area.The system will
bring in outside air and cool it.
On cool but sunnydays, the sun maywarm your upper
body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.
You can use BI-LEVEL with the
temperature control in
the middle. The system will bring
in outside air and
direct itto your upper body, while sending slightly
warmed air to your lower body.
You may notice this
temperature differencemore at some times than others.
Heating
On cold days useFLOOR with the temperature control
all the way in the red area.The system will bringin
outside air, heat it and send
it to the floor ducts.
If your vehicle hasan engine coolant heater,you can use
it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s
cold outside(0°F (-1 8OC) or lower). An engine coolant
heater warms the coolant your
engine and heating
system uses to provide heat.
See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
3-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Adjust the directionof airflow by moving the vents.
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning
fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
0
For mild outsidetemperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle.
0
Keep the hood andfront air inletfree of ice, snow or
any other obstruction,such as leaves. The heater and
defroster will workfar better, reducingthe chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.
0
When youenter a vehicle incold weather, set the
mode to FLOOR andthe fan to the highest speed
for
a few moments before driving off.
This helps clear
the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
0
Keep the air path under
the front seats clearof
objects. This helps air to circulatethroughout
your vehicle.
Defogging andDefrosting
Your system has two settings for clearing thefront and
side windows.To defrost the windows quickly, use
DEFROST with thetemperature knob(s) all the way in
the red area. To warm passengers while keeping the
windows clean, use DEFOG.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger
uses a warming gridto
remove fog from the rear
window. Press the knob to
turn the defogger on.
It will turn itself off after
about 10 minutes. If you turnit
on again, thedefogger will only run for about five
minutes before turning off.You can also turnit off by
turning off the ignitionor pressing the button again.
Do not attach anything like a temporary vehicle license
or decal acrossthe defogger grid.
NOTICE:
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Audio Systems
Your Delco Electronicsaudio system has been designed
to operate easily and
give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment
out of it if you acquaint
yourself with itfirst. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system cando and how to operate all its
controls, tobe sure you’re getting the most out
of the
advanced engineering that went into
it.
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears. Press
and hold MN until the correct minute appears.
3-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume,turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume.The knob is capableof
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the buttonwhen the ignitionis off,
the clock will showfor a few seconds.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). WithSCV,
your audio system adjusts automaticallyto make upfor
road and wind noiseas you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind theupper
knob to the right to adjust the
SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increasesthe volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use
SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows
for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN willappear in the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stationsfor a few seconds.The radio will go to
Finding a Station
3. Tune in the desired station.
AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM,FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suitsthe type of station selected.
TUNE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turnit
to choose radio stations. Pushthe knob back into its
stored position whenyou’re not usingit.
5 . Press andhold one of the six numbered buttons.The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station youset will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selectedfor that button.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the
next higher orlower station. The sound will mute
while seeking.
a station, stopfor a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning.The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFM1 and six FMZ). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to selectthe band.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen toeach of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio willscan through eachof the stations
stored on your pushbuttons,except those stations with
weak reception.The AUTO TONE setting storedfor
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or oneof the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN willbe displayed whenever the tuner
is in theP.SCAN mode. The channel number(PI-P6)
will appear momentarily
just before the frequency is
displayed. InFM mode, this function will scan through
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and
FM1 or FM2
will appear on the display.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Setting theTone
BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase bass and
thetoleft to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase treble and to the left to
decrease treble. When you
use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
3-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed
for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and
jazz
stations. CNV will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO TONE. Eachtime you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press
it again after
JAZZ appears and theAUTO TONE display willgo
blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also,if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and
the AUTO TONE
display willgo blank.
BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right for the right speakers and the
to left
for the left speakers. The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press thisknob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust
the sound to the front
speakers and to the left
for the rear speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back
into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is builtto work best with tapes that
are
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well this
in player. If
a tapeis inserted when the ignition is on but
the radio is
off, the tape willbegin playing. A tape symbol is shown
in the center of the graphic display whenever a tape is
inserted. When a tapeis active, the tapesymbol will be
accompanied by a direction arrow.
While the tape is playing, usethe VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controlsjust as you do
for the radio. Other controls may have different
functions when a tapeis inserted. The display will show
the tape symboland an arrowto show which side of the
tape is playing.
If you hearnothing or hear just a garbled sound, itmay
not be in squarely. PressEJECT to removethe tape and
start over.
The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and
will eject the tape.The radio will go back to playing the
last station selected.
The player automatically sensesthe cassette for metal or
Cr02 and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tapeis
inserted, the top sideis selected to playfirst.
PREV (1): Press this buttonor the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous selection on the tape if the current
selection has beenplaying for less than eight seconds.
If the PREV buttonis pressed and the current selection
has beenplaying for more than eight seconds,it will go
to the beginning of the current selection.Your tape
must have at least threeseconds of silence betweeneach
selection for PREV or SEEK to work.
The tape direction
arrow blinksduring PREV or SEEK operation.The
sound will muteduring PREV or SEEK operation. Press
this button orone of the SEEKarrows again to return to
normal play.
PROG (2): Press thisbutton to play the other side of
the tape.
NEXT (3): Press this buttonor the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next selection on the tape.
If you hold the
button or press it more than once,
the player will
continue moving forwardthrough the tape. Your tape
must have at least threeseconds of silence between
each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work.The tape
direction arrow blinks during NEXT orSEEK operation.
The sound will muteduring NEXT orSEEK operation.
Press this button orone of the SEEK arrows again to
return to normal play.
3-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed.The radio will
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
it
cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio,
may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
Dm (5): Press this button to reduce background noise. Notetape player needs tobe cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but
that the double-D symbol will appear
on the display.
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape
Dolby Noise Reductionis manufactured undera license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Player’’ in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
and the double-D symbolare trademarks of Dolby
The radio will display--- to show the indicator was reset.
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
F W D (6):Press this buttonto advance quickly to
CD Adapter Kits
another partof the tape. Press the button again to return It is possible to use
a CD adapter kit with your cassette
to playing speed.The radio will play the last-selected
tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your
station while the tape advances.
tape player.
AM-FM: Press this button to playthe radio when a tape
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
is in the player.
1. Turn the ignition toRUN or ACCESSORY.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to change to the tape
2. Turn the radiooff.
function when the radiois on. The tape symbol with an
arrow will appearon the display when the tape
is active.
3. Press and hold the TAPE
AUX button for five
If your systemis equipped witha remote playback
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will
flash
device, pressing this buttona second time will allow the
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
remote device to play.
4. Insert the adapter. It will power
up the radioand
EJECR Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio
begin playing.
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the
is pressed.
radio off if this button is pressed
first. If you leave a
3-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turnthe knob to theright. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume. The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recallthe station being
played. If you press the button whenthe ignition is off,
the clock will show for a few seconds.
SCV: Your system hasa feature called
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road
and wind noise as you drive.Set the volumeat the
desired level. Movethe control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjustthe SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases thevolume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed.The volume
level should always sound the sameto you as you drive.
If you don't want to use SCV, turn the controlall the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows
for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this buttonto switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Pushthe knob back into its stored
position whenyou're not using it.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to
go to the next
higher or lower station. The sound will mute while
seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear on the display. UseSCAN to
listen to stationsfor a few seconds.The radio will go to
a station, stopfor a few seconds, thengo on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning.
The sound
will mute while scanning.
3-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to your favorite stations.
You can set up to
18 stations (sixAM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONEto select the equalization that
best suits the typeof station selected.
P.SCAN orone of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
is in theP.SCAN mode. The channel number(Pl-P6)
will appear momentarilyjust before the frequencyis
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and
FM1 or FM2
will appearon the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the rightto increase bass and to the left
to
5. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons.The
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
sound will mute. When
it returns, releasethe button.
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and
the
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
automatically selectedfor that button.
knob to the rightto increase treble and to the left
to
decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and
the
P.SCAN: Press this buttonto listen to each of your
AUTO
TONE
display
will
go
blank.
If
a
station
is
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons
for a few
weak or noisy, you may wantto decrease the treble.
seconds. The radio will scan through each
of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
weak reception.The AUTO TONE setting stored for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you tochoose preset
Playing a Compact Disc
bass andtreble equalization settings designedfor
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop andjazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you
first
press AUTO TONE.Each time you press it,another
setting willappear on the display. Pressit again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display willgo
blank. Tonecontrol will return tothe BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if youuse the BASS and TREBknobs,
control will return tothem and the AUTO TONE
display willgo blank.
Insert a disc partway intothe slot, label side up.The
player will pullit in. The disc should begin playing.The
display will showCD and the CD symbol. If you want
to insert acompact disc with the ignitionoff, first press
RECALL or EJECT.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the rightfor the right speakers and tothe left
for the left speakers.The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust the
sound to the front
speakers and tothe left for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between
the speakers.
Push these knobsback into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and ERR (error) mayappear on
the display. Press RECALL to take ERR off the display
When things getback to normal, the disc should play.If
the disc comes out, it could be that:
0
The disc is upside down.
0
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
0
It is very humid. (Ifso, wait about an hour and
try again.)
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to
go to theprevious track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds.If the PREV button
is pressed and the current selection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it willgo to the beginningof
the current selection.If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue
moving back
through the disc. The sound will mutewhile seeking.
3-13
. .
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
RDM (2): Press this button tohear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order.RANDOM will show on
the display. PressRDM again to turnoff random play.
RDM is reset to off when
the disc is ejected.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right
SEEK arrow
to go to the next track.If you hold the button or press
it more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through the disc.The sound will mute
while seeking.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc
is in the player.The letters CD will gooff the display.
CD AUX: Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on.
A CD icon will appear on
the display when the discis in the player, whetherit is
active or not. If your system is equipped with a remote
playback device, pressing this button a second time will
allow the remote device to play.
E JECRPress this button to
remove the disc.The radio
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse will play. The disc will start at the first track when you
reinsert it.
within a track. Releaseit to play the passage.You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
If you turn offthe ignition or radio with
a disc in the
passage more easily.
player, it will stayin the player. Whenyou turn on
the ignitionor system, the disc will start playing where
FWD (6): Press andhold this button to advance
quickly within a track.Release it to resume playing.
it was stopped.If you press EJECT but don’t remove
You can use the counter reading on the display to locate the disc, the player will pull the disc back in to protect
it after aboutone minute. If you leave a compact disc
a passage easily.
in the player while listening to the radio,
it may
RECALL: Press this button to see which track
is
become
warm.
playing. Pressit again withinfive seconds to see how
long it has been
playing (elapsed time).The track
number alsoappears when you change the volumeor
when a new track starts to play.
3-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
THEFTLOCK' is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is
removed. Your
audio system is equipped with THEFTLOCKif
THEFTLOCK is displayedon the front of the radio.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio maybe used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protectedby the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operateif stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicatea locked conditionanytime battery
power has been interrupted.If your battery loses power
for any reason, you mustunlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how toenter
your secretcode to activate the THEFTLOCK system.
It is recommended that you read
through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you must start theprocedure over at Step 4.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1. Write down any threeor four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Nextyou will usethe
secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press HR to make the firstone or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will showREP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and thistime the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radiois secure. The
indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
when the ignition is turnedoff.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secretcode as follows; pauseno more than
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
15 seconds between steps:
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
1. LOC appears when the ignition ison.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
3. Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after youhave confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radiois
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrongcode eight times,INOP will
appear on the display.You will have to waitan hour
with the ignition on before you
can try again. Whenyou
try again, you will only have three
chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret codeas follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
3-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secretcode you have written down.
The display will show---,indicating thatthe radio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will
appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery poweris removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn
on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio,see “Unlocking the
Loss” earlier in
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power
this section.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you
can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on
your steering wheel.
VOLUME: Press the up or
down arrow to increase or
decrease volume.
SEEK: Press theup arrow
to tune to the next radio
station and the down arrow
to tune to theprevious
radio station.
PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
compact disc when the radio is playing.
MUTE: Press thisbutton to silencethe system. Pressit
again to turn onthe sound.
If a cassette tape orcompact disc is playing, the player
will advance with the up arrow and rewind with the
down arrow.
PRESET Press this button to play a station you
have
programmed on the radio preset buttons.
AM-FM: Press this button to choose AM,FM1 or FM2.
If a cassette tape orcompact disc is playing, it will stop
and the radio will play.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than
for FM,
especially at night.The longer range, however,can
cause stations to interfere with
each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines.Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
3-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
FM Stereo
FM stereo will giveyou the best sound,but FM signals
will reach onlyabout 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with
FM signals, causing
the sound tocome and go.
Tips About Your AudioSystem
Hearing damagefrom loud noiseis almost undetectable
until it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions
by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your
hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing lossor damage:
0
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like atape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add whatyou want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly.
Added sound
equipment may interferewith the operationof
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment,
check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone
units.
--
--
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not
cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapesshould be stored in their
cases awayfrom contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or maycause failure of the tape player.
Your tape playershould be cleaned regularly afterevery
50 hours of use.Your radio may displayCLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player
for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer.If this message appears on
the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It willstill play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to preventdamage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known goodcassette to see if it is the tape orthe tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette
tape player is the use
of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape headas the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaningcassette is availablethrough
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When using ascrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unitis equipped with a cut tape detection
feature
and a cleaning cassette may
appear as a broken tape.To
prevent the cleaningcassette from being ejected, use the
following steps.
1. Turn the ignition toRUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the displaywill flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5 . Eject the cleaning cassette afterthe manufacturer s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, thecut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses cassette
a
with afabric belt to clean
the tape head.This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject onits own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean asthoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold
EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subjectto wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time.Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discsis not advised,due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged.If the mast shouldever become
Care of Your Compact Discs
slightly bent, you can straighten
it out by hand. If the
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases mast is badly bent, as it might be
by vandals, you should
or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlight
replace it.
and dust.If the surface of a discis soiled, dampen a
is still
clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution and Check everyonce in a while to be sure the mast
tightened
to
the
fender.
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
k%
NOTES
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
?
&
NOTES
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
b
NOTES
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
&
NOTES
3-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0Section 4
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kindsof roads and invarying weather conditions. We’vealso
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-11
4- 12
4- 14
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
4- 15
4-18
4- 19
4-20
4-20
4-2 1
4-23
4-27
4-29
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
Assume that pedestriansor other driversare going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common.Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving.
You never
know when the vehicle in front of you
is going to
brake or turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number
one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands
of victims
every year.
Defensive Driving
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs
to drive
a vehicle:
Judgmenr
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
Chevrolet: Buckle up.(See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready
for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads
or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.’’
4-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
MuscularCoordination
0
Vision
0
Attentiveness.
Police records show thatalmost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result
of someone whowas drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with morethan 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol,so they
never drive after drinking.For persons under 2 1, it’s
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive.
But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
driver plans todrive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinkingdepends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed beforeand
during drinking
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According tothe American Medical Association,a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three
12-ounce
(355 ml) bottlesof beer in an hour will
end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reachthe
same BAC by drinking three
4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinksif each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
0.05 percent, and that the effects
are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of beinga collision
in
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC
of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level
of
0.06 percent has doubled his
or her chance of having
a
collision. At a BAC level 0.10
of percent, the chanceof
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
this driver having a collision
is 12 times greater; ata
a lower relative percentageof body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, the chanceis 25 times greater!
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that
a
to rid itself of the alcohol
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a The body takes about an hour
man of her same body weight when each has the same in one drink.No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll
be careful” isn’t the
number of drinks.
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need
to
The law in manyU.S. states sets the legal limit
at a BAC
take sudden action,as when a child darts into the street?
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of
U.S. states, and
A person with even a moderate BAC might be
notable
throughout Canada, the limitis 0.08 percent. In some
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
other countries, it’s even lower.
The BAC limit for all
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
commercial drivers inthe United Statesis 0.04 percent.
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
The BAC will beover 0.10 percent afterthree to six
alcohol in a person’s system
can make crash injuries
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,it
worse, especially injuriesto the brain, spinal cordor
depends on how much alcohol
is in the drinks, and how
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
quickly the person drinks them.
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
But the abilityto drive is affected well belowa BAC of
person’s chanceof being killedor permanently disabled
0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skillsof
is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.
many peopleare impaired at a BAC approaching
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.
For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) withinan hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to
0.12 percent. A person who
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have
a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
A
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness
and
judgment can be affectedby even a small amount
of alcohol. You can havea serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designatea driver who will
not drink.
--
--
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that makeyour vehicle go where
you want it to go. They arethe brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where
the tires meetthe road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow ice,
or it’s
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and roadcan provide. That means youcan lose control
of your vehicle.
4-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Braking
Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy
Braking actioninvolvesperception time and reaction time. braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This
is a mistake.Your brakes may not havetime to cool
First, you have to decide
to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perceptiontime. Then you have to bring up your between hard stops.Your brakes will wear out much
faster if youdo a lotof heavy braking.If you keep pace
foot anddo it. That’s reaction time.
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
Average reaction time is
about 3/4 of a second. But
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That
that’s only an average. It might
be less with one driver
means better braking and longer brake life.
and as longas two or three seconds or more with
If your engine ever stops whileyou’re driving, brake
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
and eyesight all play a part.
So do alcohol, drugsand
pedal may get harder to push down. If your
engine
frustration. But even in3/4 of a second, a vehicle
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m).
you
will use it whenyou brake. Once the power assist
That could be alot of distance in an emergency,
so
is
used
up, itmay take longer to stop and the brake
keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others
pedal will be harder to push.
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the conditionof your brakes; the weight
of the
vehicle and the amount
of brake force applied.
4-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS
is an
advanced electronic braking system that will
help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you beginto drive
away, your anti-lock brake system willcheck itself. You
may hear a momentary motor
or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal movesor pulses a little. This is normal.
ANTI LOCK
..... .
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stayon or
flash. See “Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal
jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheelsare slowing down.If one
of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
than any driver could. The computer
is programmed to
the brake pedal or always decrease
to get your foot up to
stopping distance.If you get too closeto the vehicle in
make the most of available tire and road conditions.
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough roomup ahead to stop, even though
you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock workfor you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation
or notice some noise, but
this is normal.
LOW
TRAC
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
this light will comeon. See
“Anti-Lock BrakeSystem
Active Light” in the Index.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, yourcomputer keeps receiving updateson
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assistbecause the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but
it will take muchmore effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at reasonable
a
speed.
A lot of the “driver lostcontrol” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner,each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The
traction of the tires againstthe road surface makesit
possible for the vehicle tochange its path when youturn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction,inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle
on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems
-- steering and
acceleration -- have todo their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places.You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steerthe vehicle theway you wantit
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs nearcurves warn that you should
adjust your speed.Of course, theposted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less
favorable conditions you’ll want to
go slower.
If you need toreduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before youenter the curve, while yourfront
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speedso you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to
accelerate until you areout of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and
your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor
you can control.
4-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steeringcan be more effective
than braking.For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped
in your lane, or car
a suddenly
pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts out
from
between parked cars and stops right in front
of you.
You can avoid these problems
by braking -- if you
can stop in time. Butsometimes you can’t; thereisn’t
room. That’s thetime for evasive action-- steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlierin this section.) It is better to
remove as much speedas you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to theleft
or right depending onthe space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a
quick decision.If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended9 and 3 o’clock positions,you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. Butyou have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straightenthe wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
on a
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the The driver of a vehicle about to pass another
two-lane highway waitsfor just the right moment,
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle
on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error
in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenlyput the passing driverface to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents-- the head-on collision.
/
y
edge of paved sudace
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should befairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing inthe way,
steer so that your vehicle straddlesthe edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel upto
one-quarter turn untilthe right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheelto go
straight down the roadway.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
So here are some tipsfor passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect
your passing patterns.If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your sideof the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
of the right laneto pass. When you arefar enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see
its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther awayfrom you
than it really is.)
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially ifyou’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
0
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time
your move so you will be
increasing speedas the time comes to move intothe
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have
a “running start” that
more than makes upfor the
distance you would lose by dropping back.And if
something happens tocause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down
and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
0
Try not to pass more thanone vehicle at atime
on two-lane roads.Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
0
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though thebrake lamps are not flashing,it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, makeit easy for the
following driver to get ahead
of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take
care that someone isn’t trying
to
pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glanceover your shoulder andcheck
the blind spot.
Check your mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane
change signal before moving out
Loss of Control
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens whenthe three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where
the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice,
gravel or other materialis on the road.For safety, you’ll
In a skid, a driver can lose control
of the vehicle.
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by
taking reasonable
conditions. It is important to slow downon slippery
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdnving” surfaces because stopping distance willbe longer and
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
vehicle control more limited.
The three typesof skids correspond to your vehicle’s
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
three control systems. In the
braking skid, your wheels
your best to avoidsudden steering, accelerationor
aren’t rolling. Inthe steering or cornering slud, too
braking (including engine braking by shifting toa
much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip
lower gear). Anysudden changes could cause the tires
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
to slide. You may not realize the surfaceis slippery
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn recognize
to
warning clues -- such as enough water, iceor packed
A cornering skidand an acceleration skidare best
snow on the road to make “mirrored
a
surface” -- and
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
slow down when youhave any doubt.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
accelerator pedaland quickly steer theway you want the
avoid only the braking skid.
vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your
vehicle may straighten out.Always be ready for a
second skid ifit occurs.
Skidding
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Driving at Night
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearviewmirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especiallyon higher speed roads.Your
headlamps can lightup only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch
for animals.
0
If you’re tired, pulloff the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one cansee as well at nightas in the daytime. Butas
we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice
as much light tosee the
same thingat night as a 20-year-old.
Night drivingis more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some driversare likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tipson night driving.
Drivedefensively.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day
in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but theyalso make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blindedby approaching
headlamps. It can take a secondor two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust tothe dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and onWet Roads
Keep your windshield and all
the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out.Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even theinside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean
glass would,
making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up
far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn
or curve. Keep your
eyes moving;that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Justas your headlamps should be
checked regularlyfor proper aim, so should youreyes
be examined regularly. Somedrivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light-- and
aren’t evenaware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turnas well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’tas good ason dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise go
to slower and be
cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexesare
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Driving too fast through large water puddles
or even
The heavier the rain,the harder it is to see. Evenif your
can cause problems, too.
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain going through some car washes
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.
pavement markings, theedge of the road and even
people walking.
4-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much watercan build up
under your tires that they
can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if theroad is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact withthe road.
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody
of your vehicle.If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much treador if the pressure in one or
more is low. It canhappen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles,and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, therecould be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens athigher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard andfast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires withproper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)
4-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Geta city map and plan your trip
into an
unknown part of the cityjust as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities.You’ll save time and energy.
(See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because thecorner is busy enough to
need it. Whena light turns green, and
just before you
start to move,check both ways for vehicles thathave
not cleared the intersectionor may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch outfor
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually ramp
a
that leads to the
freeway. If you havea clear viewof the freeway as you
drive alongthe entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow.Try to merge into the gap at closeto
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check
your mirrors and glanceover your shoulderas often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly withthe traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed the
to
posted limitor to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use
your turn signal.
Just before youleave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But theyhave their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic andkeep to the right.Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast
or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on afreeway as a passing lane.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Once you are moving onthe freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonablefollowing distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not,
under any circumstances,stop and back up.Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
0
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids:Have you checked
all levels?
0
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
0
Tires: They are vitallyimportant to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Arethe tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
0
Weather Forecasts:What’s the weatheroutlook
along your route? Should you delay your atrip
short time to avoid a majorstorm system?
0
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
The exit speedis usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your senseof motion. After drivingfor any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower thanyou actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try tobe well rested.If you
must start when you’re
not fresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles first
that part
of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing andshoes you
can easily drivein.
Is your vehicle ready
for a long trip?If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to If
go.it needs
service, haveit done before starting out.Of course,
you’ll find experiencedand able service experts in
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help
if you need it.
Here are some things you can
check before a trip:
0
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
0
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
4-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is itjust plain falling asleep at the wheel? it
Call
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch
of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum
of the tires on
the road, thedrone of the engine, and the
rush of the
wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy.
Don’t let it happen to you! Ifit does, your vehiclecan
leave the roadin less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Then here aresome tips:
0
Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
0
If you get sleepy, pulloff the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or
both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountainsis different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here aresome tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
A CAUTION:
Coasting downhill inNEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignitionoff is dangerous. Your brakes will
have to do all the work
of slowing down. They
could get so hot thatthey wouldn’t work well,
You would then have poor braking oreven none
going down ahill, You could crash.Always have
your enginerunning and yourvehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the
slowing down.Shift to a lower gear when yougo
down a steepor long hill.
0
If you don’t shiftdown, your brakescould get
so hot thatthey wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking even
or none going
down ahill. You could crash. Shift down let
to
your engine assistyour brakeson a steep
downhill slope.
4-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool
your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb thehill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hillsor mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut
across the centerof the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top
of a hill, be alert. There could b
something in your lane,like a stalled car or an acciden
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads.
Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Here are some tips for winter
driving:
clothing,
Have your vehicle in goodshape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
a small
shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth
and
a
couple of reflective warning triangles.And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag
of sand, apiece of old carpet ora couple of burlap bags
to helpprovide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
least tractionof all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32 O F ; O O C ) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews
road probably havegood traction.
can get there.
However, if thereis snow or ice between your tires and the Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
road, you can havea very slippery situation. You’ll havea
or loose snow-- drive with caution. Accelerate gently.
lot less traction or “grip” and will need tovery
be carekl.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Driving on Snow orIce
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” inthe Index.
Allow greaterfollowingdistance on any slippery road.
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or icecan be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble
because it may offer the
4-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Watch for slippery spots.The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice.
On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun
can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surfaceof a curve or an overpass may
remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patchof ice aheadof you, brake beforeyou
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actuallyon
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
1:~
~
u’re Caught in a Blizzard
Tie a red clothto your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped bythe snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself
or
tuck under your clothing
to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you are near help
and you can hike throughthe snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
You can run the engine to keep warm,but be careful.
4-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle.
CO (carbon monoxide) gas
This can cause deadly
to get inside. CO could overcome you
and kill
you. You can’t seeit or smell it,so you might not
know it is in your vehicle.
Clear away snowfrom
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time
to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side
of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This
will help
keep CO out.
4-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. Whenyou run the engine, makeit go a little faster
than just idle. Thatis, push the accelerator slightly.
This
uses less fuelfor the heat thatyou get andit keeps the
battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost
all theway to preserve the heat. Start the
engine again
and repeat this only when
you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle anddo some fairly vigorous exercises
every half houror so until help comes.
Loadir Your Vehicle
~
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
MFDBYGENERALMOTORSCORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
FRT.
CTR.
RR.
TOTAL
LBS.
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY
WEIGHT
XXX
COLD TIRE
TIRE SIZE
PRESSURE
SPEED
PSlfKPa
RTG
FRT.
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
1
RR.
,
SPA.
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PS1/28KPa
SEE OWNER‘S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight
it
may properly carry.The Tire-Loading Information label
is inside the trunk lid. The label tells you theproper size,
speed rating andrecommended inflation pressuresfor
the tires onyour vehicle. It also gives you important
information about the number of people that can be in
your vehicle and the total weight you can carry.
This
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
The other label is the Certification
label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door.It tells you the gross
weight capacityof your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating).The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWRfor your vehicleor the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
If you do have a heavyload, spread it out. Don’t carry
more than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.
4-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
’ A CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the GVWR, or either the maximum front or
rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your
vehicle
can break, orit can change the
way your
vehicle handles. These could cause
you to lose
control. Also, overloading can shorten the
life
of your vehicle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because
of overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle
-- like suitcases,
tools, packagesor anything else -- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes.If you have tostop or turn quickly, or
if there isa crash, they’llkeep going.
4-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
A
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
0 Put thingsin the trunkof your vehicle. In a
trunk, put themas far forward asyou can.
Try to spread theweight evenly.
0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside thevehicle so that some of them are
above the topsof the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraintin
your vehicle.
0 When you carry somethinginside the
vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can.
0 Don’t leave a seat folded down unless
you
need to.
\
fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
I
CAUTIbn :
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when youpull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the brakes may not work well or even at all.
You and your passengers could be seriously
injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered byyour
warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed
all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
--
That’s the reasonfor this part. Init are many
time-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules.
Many of these areimportant for your safety and thatof
your passengers.So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against thedrag of the added weight.The engine is
required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the
trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here aresome important points:
0
Your vehicle can tow a trailerif it is equipped with the
proper trailer towingequipment. To identify whatthe
vehicle trailering capacityis for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer’,
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering meanschanges in handling, durability and
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure
your rig will belegal, not only where you
live but
also where you’llbe driving. A good source for this
information canbe state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
Don’t tow a trailerat all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km)that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make startsat full throttle.This helps your
engine and other partsof your vehicle wearin at the
heavier loads.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than
55 mph (90 km/h)) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have todo with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safelybe?
1,000 lbs. (450 kg). But
It should never weigh more than
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on howyou plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude,road grades, outside temperature andhow
4-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you haveon your vehicle.
You can ask your dealerfor our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because
it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle.The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight
of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. Andif you will tow a trailer, you
must add thetongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too.See “Loading
Your Vehicle” inthe Indexfor more informationabout
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the
Tire-Loading Information label (foundinside the trunk
lid) or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.Then be
sure you don’tgo over the GVW limitfor your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
A
B
If you’re using aweight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the totalloaded trailer weight (B).
After you’veloaded your trailer, weighthe trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to seeif the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, youmay be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitchequipment.
Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use onlyframe-mounted
a
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Will you have to make any holes in the body
of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do,
then be sure toseal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide”in the Index).Dirt
and watercan, too.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
You should always attach chains between
your vehicle
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.
If the trailer has
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
of the trailerso that the tongue will not
drop to the road
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure
if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch. Instructions
the brakes are working. Thislets you check your
about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch
electrical connection atthe same time.
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
chains anddo not attach themto the bumper. Always
are still working.
leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Safety Chains
Following Distance
Trailer Brakes
Because you have anti-lock brakes,do not try to tap into
your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake
systems won’t work well,or at all.
Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle aheadas you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Driving witha Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before settingout for the open road, you’ll want to
get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with
the feel of
handling and braking with
the added weightof the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deallonger and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicleis by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much
farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you
can return to your lane.
4-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Backing Up
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move
your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
When you tow a trailer,your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with yourChevrolet dealer. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal
a turn
or lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps
will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even
if the bulbs
on the trailerare burned out.Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they
are not. It’simportant to check occasionally tobe sure
the trailerbulbs are still working.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailerto come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer,make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t
strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoidjerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal
well in advance.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before you start
down a longor steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you mighthave to use yourbrakes so much that
they would get hot and
no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If you are towing a trailer, you may want to drive in
DRIVE (D) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0)
(or, as you need to, alower gear).
4-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if youever have to park your rig
on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shiftinto
PARK (P) yet.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Shift into a gear; and
0
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly untilthe trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer.See the Maintenance Schedule for more
Have someone placechocks under the trailer wheels.
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle
fluid (don’t overfill),
When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
engine
oil,
belt,
cooling
system
and
brake adjustment.
regular brakes untilthe chocks absorb the load.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s
brake, and then shift to
PARK (P).
a good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking ona Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and
hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
4-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions.See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
NOTES
4-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
k%
NOTES
4-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
@% NOTES
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
@% NOTES
4-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0 Section 5
Problems onthe Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur
on the road.
5-2
Hazard Warning
Flashers
5-3
Jump Starting
5-8
Towing
Your
Vehicle
5- 13
Engine
Overheating
5-16
Cooling
System
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5-25
5-25
5-37
5-38
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the switch (located near
the ignition switch)to
make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash
on and
off. Your hazard warning flashers work
no matter what
position your key in,
is and even if the key
isn't in.
To turn off the flashers, pressthe switch again. When
the hazard warning flashers are
on, your turn signals
won't work.
Your hazard warning flasherslet you warn others. They
also let police know
you have a problem.Your front and
off.
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and
5-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your batteryhas run down, you may want to use
another vehicle andsome jumper cables tostart your
vehicle. But please follow the steps below todo it safely.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps
could result incostly damage
to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Tryingto start yourvehicle by pushing
or pulling itwon’t work, andit could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must havea 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Batteries canhurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
They contain acid that can burn
you.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
0 They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these things canhurt you.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTICE:
If the othersystem isn’t a 12-volt system with
a
negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are,it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibilityof the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in
the jump start procedure. Put your automatic
transaxle in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all
lamps that aren’t needed, and radios.
This will avoid
sparks and helpsave both batteries. Andit could
save your radio!
I NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. (Your
vehicle’s battery is located under the windshield
was‘ :fluidreservoir.)
An electric fan canstart up even when the engineis
not runningand can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing
and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
5-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery. Your vehiclehas a remote positive(+)
jump starting terminal. The terminal is on the same
side of the engine compartment as your battery.
The
remote positive (+) terminal is located near the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.You should
always use the remote positive(+) terminal instead
of the positive(+) terminal on your battery.To
uncover the remote positive(+) terminal, lift the red
plastic cap.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the Delco Freedom’ battery
installed in every
new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps,be sure the right amount
of fluid is there.If it is low,add water to take care
of that fiist. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid
that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you.If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or onyour skin, flushthe place with
water and get medical help immediately.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6. Check that thejumper cables don’t haveloose or
missing insulation.If they do, you couldget a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before’youconnect the cables, hereare some basic
things you shouldknow. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go toa metal
engine part. Don’t connect positive
(+) to
negative (-), or you’ll get a short that would
damage the battery and maybe other parts,
to1
1
Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal.Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use aremote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Connect the red positive(+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything untilthe next
step. The other end of the negative cabledoesn ’t go to
the dead battery.
12. Try to start the vehicle withthe dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries,
it probably
needs service.
It goesto a heavy, unpainted,metal part on the engine of
the vehiclewith the dead battery.
13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
10. Attach the cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but notnear engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but the chance of sparks gettingback to the
battery is muchless.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
B. Good Battery
C . Dead Battery
5-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a dealer ora professional towing service tow
your vehicle.
If your vehicle has been changed or modified since
it
was factory-newby adding aftermarket itemslike fog
lamps, aero skirting or special tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not be correct.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
0
That your vehiclecannot be towed from the front or
rear with sling-type equipment.
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
0
The make, model and yearof your vehicle.
0
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
0
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let
the tow operator
know that this manual contains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations.The operator may want
to see them.
5-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
To help avoidinjury toyou or others:
Never let passengers ride in vehicle
a
that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safeor posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
Never get under yourvehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
0 Always secure thevehicle on each side with
separate safety chainswhen towing it.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
A wnicle can fall from
a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause
a collision,
serious personal injury and
vehicle damage.The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or
steel cables before
it is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that canbe cut by sharp
edges underneath thetowed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
When your vehicle is beingtowed, have the ignition
turned to theOFF position. The steering wheelshould
be clamped in a straight-ahead position, witha clamping
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steeringcolumn lock for this. The transaxle
should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking
brake released.
NOTICE:
Don’t have yourvehicle towed on the drive
wheels, unless you must. If the vehicle must be
towed on the drivewheels, do not tow the vehicle
more than500 cumulative miles (800 km) or
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Cumulative miles are
defined as total miles over thelife of the vehicle.
For example, your vehicle cannot be towed
500 miles (800 km) each dayof a trip totaling
3,000 miles (4800 km). If these limitations must
be exceeded,then the drivewheels have to be
supported on a dolly.
5-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or
fascidfog lamp damagewill occur. Usewheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for
car-carrier securing.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle
to ground orvehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, raise thevehicle until
adequate clearanceis obtained between the
ground and/orwheel-lift equipment.
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
5-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Attach T-hook chains in
front of the wheels, into
the side slots of the cradle,
on both sides.
Rear Towing
A towing dolly must be used under the drive wheels
when towingfrom the rear
These slots are to be used when loadingor securing to
car-carrier equipment.
Attach a separate safety
chain around the outboard
end of each lower
control arm.
5-11
~
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipmentor the rear
bumper valance will be damaged.Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use
safety chainsand wheel straps. Use the T-slots for
car-carrier securing.
Towing a vehicle over rough surfacescould
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle
to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To
help avoid damage, installa towing dollyand raise
the vehicle until adequate clearanceis obtained
between the ground and/orwheel-lift equipment.
Do not attachwinch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook Slots.
5-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Attach T-hook chainsinto
the slots in the bottom of
the floor pansupport rails,
just ahead of the rear
wheels, on both sides.
These slots are to be used when securingto
car-carrier equipment.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a hot
engine warning light on your instrument panel. See
“Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and “Engine
Coolant Temperature Warning Light” in the Index.You
also have a LOW COOLANT light
on your instrument
panel. See “Low Coolant Light” in the Index.
Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode (3100 Engine Only)
Should an overheated engine condition exist, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups
of three cylinders helps preventengine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a significant loss in power
and
engine performance. The low coolant lightmay come on
and the temperature gage will indicate an overheat
condition exists. This emergency operating mode allows
your vehicle tobe driven to a safe place inan
emergency. Towinga trailer in theoverheat protection
mode shouldbe avoided.
I NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode,to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss and change the oil. See
“Engine Oil, When to Change” in the Index.
5-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from theengine if you see or hearsteam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no
sign of steam or coolant beforeyou open the hood.
If you keep drivingwhen your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch
fire. You or
others couldbe badly burned. Stop your
engine if
it overheats, andget out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.If your vehicle has the
3100 engine, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” in the Index.
5-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you getthe overheat warning but see orhear no
steam, theproblem may not be tooserious. Sometimes
the engine can get alittle too hot when you:
0
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan
drive. Just to besafe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’tcome back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop,
and park your
vehicle right away.
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle
the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see if
the warning stops.But then, if you still have the
warning, turn ofSthe engine andget everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down.If your vehicle has the
3 100 engine, see“Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
2. Turn on your heater tofull hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window
as necessary.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
0
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get theoverheat warning with no signof steam,
try this for a minuteor so:
3. If you’re in a trafficjam, shift to NEUTRAL(N);
otherwise, shift tothe highest gearwhile
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a).
5-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
vou’ll see:
3800 (Code K) Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Reservoir
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
3100 (Code M) Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Reservoir
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
. ..
.
:
If the coolant inside the coolantrecovery tank is boiling,
don't do anything else until it cools down.
The coolant level shouldbe at orabove the COLD mark
on a cold engine. The coolant level shouldbe at or
above theHOT mark on a hot engine.
If it isn't, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump
or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
5-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
~~~
~~~
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, canbe very hot. Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run theengine if there is a leak. If yOd
the engine, it could lose all coolant.That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leakfixed before you drive thevehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your
engine
without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty.
If there seems to beno leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the
engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If you haven’t founda problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the COLD mark, add 50/50
a
mixture of clean
water (preferably distilled) [email protected]
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
Adding only plain water to your
cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other
liquid likealcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’scoolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plainwater or thewrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot butyou wouldn’t
get the overheatwarning. Your engine could
catch fire andyou or otherscould be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
NOTICE:
A CAUTION:
In cold weather, water can freeze
and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolantand the proper
coolant mixture.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engineparts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
When the coolantin the coolant recovery tank
is at the
COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s
one more
thing you can try.
You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly tothe radiator, butbe sure the cooling
system is cool before you do
it.
5-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the
cooling system,including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling systemand
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to
turn the pressure cap.
--
--
5-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
I NOTICE:
2. Then keep turning
the pressure cap, but
now push down as you
turn it. Remove the
pressure cap.
Your engine hasa specific radiator fill procedure.
Failure tofollow this procedurecould cause your
engine to overheat and severely
be
damaged.
1. You can remove the
radiator pressurecap
when thecooling
system, including the
radiator pressurecap and
upper radiator hose,is
no longer hot.
You can be burnedif you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolanton a hotengine.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop.A hiss means
there is stillsome pressure left.
5-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed
valve or valves.
3 100 V6 (VIN Code M): There are two bleed valves.
One is located on the thermostat housing.The other is
located on the thermostat bypass tube.
5-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3800 V6 (VIN Code K):
There is one bleed valve.
It is located on the
themostat housing.
Fill the radiator with the
proper [email protected]
coolant mixture, up to
the base of the filler
neck. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index
for more information
about the proper
coolant mixture.)
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air bleed
valve, close the valve.Otherwise, close the valves after
the radiator is filled.
5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolantfrom the engine
and the compartment.
6. Then fill the coolant recovery tank tothe
COLD mark.
7. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the pressurecap off.
5-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
8. Start the engine andlet it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
10. Then replace the pressure cap.At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins toflow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level
is lower, add
more of the proper [email protected] coolant mixture
through the filler neck untilthe level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
11. Check the coolant in the recovery tank.The level in
the coolant recovery tank should be at HOT
the
mark when the engineis hot or at the COLD mark
when the engineis cold.
5-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out”while you’re driving,
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
especially if you maintain your tires properly.If air goes
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
out of a tire, it’smuch more likelytoleakoutslowly.warningflashers.
But if you shouldever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what toexpect and whatto do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well outof the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much likea
skid andmay require the sarne correctionyou’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout,
remove your footfrom the
accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to
go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you canstill steer. Gently
brake to a stop-- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how
to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a tire can causean injury. The vehicle
can slipoff the jack and roll overyou or other
people. You and they could be badlyinjured.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set theparking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift leverin PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be evenmore certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would bethe tire on theother side of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
................................
.................................
................................
...............
.
^*
:z
The equipment you’ll need
is in the trunk. Pull the
carpeting from the floor of
the trunk. Turn the center
nut on the compact spare
tire cover to the left to
remove it. Then lift and
remove the cover.
Turn the wing nut to theleft
and remove it. Then liftoff
the spacer and remove the
The following steps will tell
you how to use thejack and
change a tire.
5-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
spare tire. See “Compact
Spare Tire” later in this
section for more information
about the compact spare.
Turn the nutholding the jack and wrenchto the left and
remove it.Then remove the jack and wrench.
The tools you’ll be using include the
jack (A),
socket (B) and wheel wrench (C).
5-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If there is a wheel cover,loosen the nut caps with the
wheel wrench. They won’t
come off. Then, using the
flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the
edge of the
wheel cover untilit comes off. Be careful; theedge may
be sharp. Don’t try to remove the cover with your
bare hands.
5-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
To remove a center cap, use
the wrench to pry gently at
the notch. Don’t use a tool that is narrower than the
wrench to pry atthis notch.
If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, remove them using
the wheel wrench.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
7
3. Position the jack under
thevehicleand raise the
jack lift head until itfits
firmly into the notch in
the vehicle’s frame
nearest the flat tire.
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
2. Turn the jack handle to the right to raise the jack
lift
head a few inches.
5-29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
FRONT
VEHICLE
-
REAR EDGE OF FRONT
WHEEL OPENING
Front
The pictures shown directly above display the
vehicle’s front notch location and the vehicle’s rear
notch location respectively.
5-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
FRONT EDGE OF
REAR WHEEL
Rear
Put the compactspare tire near you.
I
Getting undera vehicle when it is jacked upis
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack,you
could be badly injured
or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
I
A CAUTION:
Raising yourvehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage thevehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to
fit the jacklift
head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
I
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle to the
right. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the groundfor
the spare tireto fit under the vehicle.
5. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheelbolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
-A CAUTION:
Rust or dirt
on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an
accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
the
where thewheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a papertowel
to dothis; but be sure touse a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs ornuts. If you
do, the nuts mightcome loose. Your wheelcould
fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
7. Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded endof
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
8. Lower the vehicleby turning the jack handle to the
left. Lower thejack completely.
5-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1 9.
Tighten the wheel nuts
I
I NOTICE:
Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor
damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead toan accident.
Be sure touse the correctwheel nuts. If you have
to replace them,be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere assoon as you can and have the
nuts tightenedwith a torque wrench to 100 lb-ft
(140 Nom).
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
10. Don’t try to put a wheel coveron your compact
spare tire.It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in
the trunk untilyou have theflat tire repaired
or replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.If
you try to put wheel
a
cover on your compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing theFlat Tire and Tools
i
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
After you’ve putthe compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you’ll need to store the flat tire
in your trunk. Usethe
following procedure to secure theflat tire in the trunk.
Put the flat tire in the trunk so the side that facesout
when it is on the vehicleis facing down. The full-size
tire will notfit down into the well.Place it so the front is
in the well and the rear out
is of the well.
Put the bolt through
one of the wheel nut holes, install
the retainerover the bolt, then install the wing nut. Put
the spacer and nutnext to the tire in the well. Store the
cover asfar forward as possible.
The compact spare isfor temporary use only.Replace
the compact spare tire with afull-size tire as soon as you
can. See “Compact Spare” in the Index. See the storage
instructions label to replace your
compact spare into
your trunk properly.
When you install the wheelcover on the full size tire,
tighten the nut caps to 5 lb-ft (7 N-m).
5-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Storir 7 the Spare TireaT--1Tools
I
1. Nut
2. Cover
3. Wing Nut
4. Spacer
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
5. Compact Spare Tire
6. Wrench
7. Nut
5
8. Retainer
9. Jack
10. Bolt
5-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new,it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi
(420 P a ) .
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact
spare can getcaught on
the rails. That can damage thetire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare
tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to
65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish
Don’t use yourcompact spare on other vehicles.
your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want.Of course, it’s best to replace your spare And don’tmix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
Your spare
tire
andits wheel together.
will last longer and be
in good shapein case you need
it again.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage yourvehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t usetire chains on your
compact spare.
5-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want todo when your vehicleis stuck is
to spin your wheelstoo fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but
you must use caution.
NOTICE:
Spinning yourwheels can destroyparts of your
vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For informationabout using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains”in the Index.
If you let your tires spin
at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transaxleor other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fireor other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the
wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin thewheels above35 mph (55 kmh) as shown
on the speedometer.
5-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Rocking Your VehicleTo Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left
and right. That will
clear the area around your
front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE
(R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear.
If
that doesn’t get you out after
a few tries, you may need
to be towed out. If you
do need tobe towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” inthe Index.
&
NOTES
5-39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTES
5-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0 Section 6
ServiceandAppearanceCare
m
Here you will findinformation about the care of your vehicle.This section begins with service and
fuel information,
and thenit shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels.There is also technicalinfomation about your
vehicle, and a partdevoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6- 8
6-12
6-18
6- 19
6-22
6-28
6-29
6-32
6-33
6-39
6-47
6-48
6-50
6-50
6-50
Service
Fuel
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of the Safety Belts
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
6-5 1
6-52
6-53
6-53
6-53
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-55
6-55
6-62
6-63
6-65
6-65
6-65
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels (If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Vehicle Dimensions
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
6-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to
be happy withit. We hope you’ll go to your dealerfor
all your service needs.You’ll get genuineGM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want todo some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper Chevrolet Service Manual.
It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can.To order the proper service manual,
see
“Service and Owner Publications”
in the Index.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicleGM.
all
Genuine GM parts haveone of these marks:
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see “ServicingYour Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with parts
all receipts and list
the mileage and the date
of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
You can be injured and yourvehicle could be
damaged if you try to doservice work on a
vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, theproper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt anyvehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure touse the proper nuts,bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners canbe easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could behurt.
Things you might add
to the outsideof your vehiclecan
affect the airflow aroundit. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of
your vehicle.
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated
at 87 octane
or higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D4814 in the United States and
CGSB 3 5 M 9 3
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been
developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers
Association (AAMA)for better vehicle performance
and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA
specification could provide improved driveability
and emission control system protection compared
to
other gasolines.
6-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Be sure the posted octane is at least
87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough,it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated 87
at octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, yourengine needs service. But
don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving
up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane
fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test.
If this occurs, return
to your authorized Chevrolet dealer
for diagnosis to
determine the cause of failure. In the eventit is
determined that the cause
of the condition isthe type of
fuels used, repairsmay not be coveredby your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions containan octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not his fue
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
If your vehicleis certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control use of such gasolines.If fuels containingMMT are used,
spark pluglife may be reduced and your emission
label), it is designed to operateon fuels that meet
control
system performance may
be affected. The
California specifications. Ifsuch fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
Chevrolet dealerfor service.
federal specifications,but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
6-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Fuels in Foreign Countries
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now requiredto contain additives that willhelp
prevent depositsfrom forming in yourengine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system
to
function properly. Therefore, you should nothave to
add anything to the fuel.
In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, suchas ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolinesif they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the
United Statesor Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by useof improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
I NOTICE:
You can also writeus at the following addressfor
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL l H 8P7
6-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Filling Your Tank
The tethered cap is behind a hinged door on the left side
of your vehicle.
While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below the
fuel fill opening.
Gasoline vaporis highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
6-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
To remove the cap, turn it slowlyto the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it;if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
If you get gasoline on yourself
and then
something ignitesit, you could be badly burned,
Gasoline can spray outon you if you open the
fuel filler cap too
quickly. This spray can happen
if your tankis nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open thefuel filler capslowly and
wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the
way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
the
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put thecap back on, turnit to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap.
The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left offor
improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere.See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to
get the right
type. Your dealer canget one foryou. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and yourfuel tank andemissions systemmay be
damaged, See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity dischargefrom the
container can ignite the gasoline
vapor. You can
be badly burned and your
vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoidinjury toyou and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring thefill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained
until thefilling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under thc Hood
An electric fanunder thehood can start up and
injure you even when the engineis not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
/A CAUTION:
Things that burn can
get on hot engine parts and
start afire. These include liquids
like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washerand
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill
things thatwill burn onto a hot
engine.
I
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Hood Release
To open the hood,first pull
the handle located inside the
vehicle near the parking
brake pedal.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.Lift the hood.
6-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When vou oDen the hoodon the 3 100 (Code M) engine. you’ll see:
I
D
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
B. Radiator Fill Cap
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap
E. Engine Oil Dipstick
F. AutomaticTransaxle
Fluid Dipstick
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir
H. Air Filter
I. RemotePositive (+)
Battery Terminal
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
J. WindshieldWasher
Fluid Reservoir
K. Battery (located under
Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir)
When you open the hood on the
3800 (Code K) engine, you’ll see:
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
E Automatic
Transaxle
Fluid Dipstick Fluid
B. Radiator Fill Reservoir
Cap
G- Brake
Fluid
Reservoir
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Washer
Windshield
Filter H. Air
D. Engine Oil Dipstick
I. Remote Positive (+)
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery Terminal
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
J. Windshield
Washer
K. Battery
(located
under
Fluid Reservoir)
I
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler
caps are
on properly. Thenjust pull the hood down and close
it firmly.
Engine Oil
LOW
OIL
I-
If the LOW OIL light on
the instrument panel comes
on, it means you need to
check your engine oil level
right away.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
For more information, see “Low Oil Level Light” in the The engine oil dipstickhandle is the yellowloop near
the frontof the engine.
Index. You should check your engine oil level regularly;
this is an added reminder.
Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
drain
back into the oil pan.
If you don’t, theoil dipstick
It’s a good idea to
check your engine oil everytime you
might not show the actual level.
get fuel.In order to getan accurate reading,the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
6-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towelor
cloth, then pushit back in all the way. Removeit again,
keeping the tip down, and check the
level.
If the oil is at or below the lower mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind.This part explains whatkind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
3100 (CodeM) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
6-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The engine oil fill cap is located toward the frontof the
engine near the yellow-loopedengine oil dipstick.
What Kind of Engine Oilto Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can
be identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified
by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your own
oil,
be sure you use oil that
has
the Starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
somewhere in
Be sureto fill it enough to put the level
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all way
the
back in when you’re through.
If you have your oil changed
for you, be sure theoil put
into your engine is American Petroleum Institute
certified for gasoline engines.You should also use the
proper viscosity oilfor your vehicle, as shown in the
following chart:
6-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE
LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK
FOR MIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
I
7
"F
"C
+ 100,
t 3a
+ 80.
+ 27
+ 60
+ 16
+ 40.
e4
t 20 '
-7
0.
-
la
As shown in the chart,if you have the3100 engine,
SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can use SAE low-30 if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C)
or above. These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils,
such as SAE 20W-50.
I'
PREFERRED
SAE 5W-30 SAI
11
1
1
1
1
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
RECOMMENDED SAE VlSCOSlTT GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
WOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
'
O F
As shown in the chart, if you have the
3800 engine,
SAE 1OW-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can use SAE 5W-30 if it's going to be colder than
60°F (16"C) before your next oil change. When it's
very cold, you should useS A E 5W-30. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do
not use other viscosity oils,such as SAE 2OW-50.
7
"C
+ 100
. +38
+ 80
+ 27
+ 60
. +16
+ 40
.+b
+ 20
.-I
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
"Starburst" symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage
not covered by your warranty.
GM [email protected] oil meets all the requirements
for
your vehicle.
SAE 5W-30
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY
OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
6-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
If you are inan area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29"C), consider using either an
SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil oran SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection
for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil.Your dealer is readyto
advise if you thinksomething should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has an Oil Life Monitor. This feature
will let you know whento change your oil and
filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and
7,500 miles (12 500 km)since your last oil change.
Under severe conditions, the indicator may
come on
before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle
more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months
(whichever occurs first) without an oil change.
The system won’t detect dust in the
oil. So, if you
drive in a dusty area,be sure to change your oil every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Rememberto reset
the CHG OIL SOON light when theoil has been
changed. For more information, see “CHGOIL SOON
Light” in the Index.
How to Reset theCHG OIL SOON Light
Remember, afterchanging your engine oil, the system
must be reset; withthe ignition key in RUN, but the
engine off, fully push and release the accelerator pedal
three times withinfive seconds. If the CHG OIL SOON
light flashes two times, the system is reset. However
if
the light comes on and stays onfor five seconds, it did
not reset. You’ll need to reset the
system again.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay onyour skin
for very long.Clean your skin and nails with
soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used
engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to theenvironment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing
oil from the filter before disposal. Don’tever dispose of
oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,
into sewers,or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead,
recycle itby taking it toa place that collects used oil.
If
you have a problem properly disposingof your used oil,
ask your dealer,a service station ora local recycling
center for help.
6-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Air Cleaner
Pull outthe filter. Be sure to install the air filter and
install the cover tightly when you are finished.
To check or replace theair filter, remove thefour screws
and pulloff the cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace theair filter.
See "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Index.
6-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause youor others to be burned.The air cleaner
not only cleansthe air, it stops flameif the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there,and the engine
backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaner off.
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both thefluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one
or more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches90°F (32”C ) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner is off,a bacMire can cause a
damaging enginefire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which willdamage it.Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any
of these
conditions, the fluidand filter do not require changing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” inthe Index.
6-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
~~
How to Check
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
Because this operationcan be a little difficult,you may
choose to have this done at yourChevrolet dealership
Service Department.
While pulling a trailer.
If you do it yourself, be sure tofollow all the
instructions here, or you
could get afalse reading
on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
To get the right reading, the fluid should
be at
normal operating temperature, which is180°F to
200°F (82°Cto 93°C).
15 miles
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
(24 km)when outside temperatures are above
50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than50°F (lO"C), you may have
to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some
of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transaxle
fluid level ifyou have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
6-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0
Park your vehicle on
a level place. Keep the
engine
running.
0
With the parking brakkafilied, place the shiftlever
in PARK (P).
0
With your footon the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausingfor about
three secondsin each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
0
Let theengine run atidle for three tofive minutes.
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
1
3100 (CodeM) Engine
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the red
loop
near the backof the engine.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
3800 (Code K) Engine
3. Check both sidesof the dipstick, and readthe
lower level.The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pullit back out again.
6-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
How to Add Fluid
Refer tothe Maintenance Scheduleto determine what
kind of transaxle fluid
to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level islow, add only enoughof the proper
fluid to bring the levelinto the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one
pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
[email protected], because fluid with that label
is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRON-I11
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid levelis obtained, push the
dipstick backin all the way.
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicleis filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle
for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000
whichever occurs first,if you add only
DEX-COOLextended life coolant.
d:
kmb
The following explains your cooling system and how
to
add coolant whenit is low. If you have a problem with
engine overheating orif you need to add coolantto your
radiator, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and [email protected]
coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to-34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up
to 265 “F ( 129” C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
6-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
What to Use
NOTICE:
When addingcoolant, it is important thatyou use
only [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL
is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion mayresult. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months,
whichever occursfirst. Damage causedby the
use of coolant other than [email protected]
is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
--
Use a mixture of one-half
clean water (preferably
distilled) and [email protected] coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts.If you use this mixture,
you don’t needto add anything else.
A CAU
[ON:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other
liquid like alcohol, can
boil before the proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning systemis set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture,
your engine couldget too hot butyou wouldn’t
get theoverheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire andyou or otherscould beburned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
6-23
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Checking Coolant
NOTICE:
If you usean improper coolant mixture, your
engine couldoverheat andbe badly damaged.
The repaircost wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can
freeze and crack theengine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you haveto add coolant more than
four times a year,
have your dealer check
your cooling system.
I NOTICE:
If you use the propercoolant, you don’t haveto
add extra inhibitors or additives
which claim to
improve thesystem. These can be harmful.
6-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
When your engineis cold, the coolant level shouldbe
at the COLD mark or a little higher. When your engine
is warm, the level shouldbe up to theHOT mark or a
little higher.
LOW
COOLANT
If this light comes on, it
means you’re low on
engine coolant.
Adding Coolant
If you needmore coolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful notto spill it.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, add
coolant to the radiator.(See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.)
Turning the radiator pressure cap
when the
engine and radiator are hot allow
can steam and
scalding liquids toblow out and burnyou badly.
With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure capeven a
little when the engine and radiator are
hot.
--
--
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene
glycol,
and itwill burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
6-25
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Radiator Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid
NOTICE:
Your radiator capis a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must
be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
When you replace your radiator pressure cap, [email protected]
an
cap is recommended.
3100 (Code M) Engine
3800 (Code K) Engine
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled
by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stopsthe
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an
[email protected]
is recommended.
6-26
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When to Check Power SteeringFluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How To Check Power SteeringFluid
For the 3800 engine, the
level should be at the
HOT mark when the engine
compartment is hot. If the
fluid is at the ADD mark,
you should add fluid.
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe thecap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the
cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
For the 3 100 engine, when
the engine compartmentis
hot, the level should be at
the H mark. When it'scold,
the level shouldbe at the
C mark. If the fluid is
at the ADD mark, you
should add fluid.
What to Use
To determine what kind of
fluid to use, see
"Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants" in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use
the proper
fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.
6-27
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
NOTICE:
0
0
Adding Washer Fluid
0
0
Open thecap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid until the tank is full.
6-28
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage yourwasher fluidtank and
other partsof the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean aswell as washerfluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage thetank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. I t can damage
your washer system and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
is leaking out of the brake system.If it is, you should
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “topoff’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct
a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when youget new brake linings.You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Your brake master cylinder reservoiris here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why
the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down.
The first is thatthe brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the
fluid levelgoes back up. The other reason is that fluid
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid fallsto a low level, your brake
warning light willcome on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
6-29
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
What toAdd
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid -- such as Delco Supremel l @(GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
With thewrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakesmay not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.
6-30
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTICE:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. Forexample, just afew
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have tobe
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid onyour vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be
damaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid
on yourvehicle. If you do, wash itoff
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front discbrakes and reardrum brakes
if it is equipped with the 3 100 engine. Ithas four-wheel
disc brakes if it is equipped with the 3800 engine.
Disc brake padshave built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn andnew pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all thetime your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on
the brake
pedal firmly).
c
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Some driving conditions or climatesmay cause a brake
squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake padsfor wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
If you have rear drum brakes, they don’thave wear
indicators, butif you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rearbrake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brakedrums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removedfor rotation or
changing. When you have
the front brake pads replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings shouldalways be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual underPart C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
1
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-31
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
See your dealerif the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a signof brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every new Chevrolethas a Delco [email protected]
You never have to add water to
one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommend aDelco Freedom
battery. Getone that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust
for wear.
Vehicle Storage
Replacing Brake System Parts
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle
25 for
days or more,
remove the black, negative(-) cable from the battery.This
will help keep your batteryfrom running down.
The braking system on a modern vehicle
is complex.
Its many parts have to
be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicleis to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and youhave to have new ones put -in be sure
you get new approvedGM replacement parts.If you
don’t, your brakesmay no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts inbrake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle,the balance between your front and
rear brakescan change -- for the worse.The braking
performance you’ve come to
expect can change in many
other waysif someone puts inthe wrong replacement
brake parts.
6-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting’’ in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn
how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
In this section you’ll find directionsfor changing the
bulbs in some of the lamps on your vehicle. See
“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index find
to the type
of bulb you shoulduse.
Halogen Bulbs
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burstif you dropor scratch the bulb.You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
3. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by
raising the lock tab and pulling the connector away
from the bulb’s base.
Headlamps
4. Install the electrical connectorto the bulb.
1. Open the hood.
2. Press and turn the bulba quarter-turn (to the left for
the driver’s side; to the right for the passenger’s side)
and remove itfrom the retaining ring by gently
pulling it back and awayfrom the headlamp.
5 . Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab
on the bulb baseinto the matching notch in the
retaining ring. Turn the bulb
a auarter-turn to the
right until it stops.
6. Close the hood.
6-33
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Front Park and Turn SignalLamp
I
2 . Open the flapby lifting the tab.
1. Open the hood. Thereis one flap on eachside of
the radiator.
6-34
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Position the radiator air side baffle aside and
remove the two fasteners. Remove the snap screw
from the fascia.
4. Slide the headlamp assembly inboard to release the
mounting tabs and gently pull the inside
of the
assembly awayfrom the vehicle.
5 . Push the tab onthe bulb socket andturn it to the left.
hll the socket outof the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it out.
Do not twist the bulb.
7. Push in the new bulb.
8. Reverse Steps 1-4 to replace the assembly.
6-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
To reach the center high-mounted stoplamp, you
4. Push the new bulb into the socket and turn it to
must
the right.
5. Replace the bulb and socket in the assembly.
PU through the tnmk.
TaiUStoplIhm Signal Lamp
I
1. Open the trudc.Remove the convenience netif you
have one.Unhook the net from the upper wing nut.
2. Remove the upper
(convenience net)
wing nut, if equipped.
U
3. pull the carpet
away fiom the rear
of the vehicle.
1. Open the trunk lid. Locate the stoplamp behind the
rear seats, in front of the tnsnkhinges.
2. Tusll the socket to the left until it stops.and pull the
bulb and socket outof the assembly.
3. h s h in the bulb, tnrn it to the left and pull
it out of
the socket.
6-36
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
4. Unscrew the two remaining wing nuts.
5 . Pull the assembly fromthe body carefully.
6. To remove a socket,
press the tab,turn the
socket to theleft and
pull it out.
Back-up Lamp
1. Open the trunk. The back-up lamp bulbs are in the
rear of the trunk lid.
2. Press the tab on the
socket, turnthe socket to
the left and pull it out.
7. Pull the bulb out. Do not twist it.
8. Push the new bulb into the socket.
9. Replace the socket in the assembly.
10. Tighten the socket by turningit to the right.
11. Install the assembly and the two lower wing nuts.
12. Replace the carpeting.
13. Replace the upper (convenience net) wing nut, if
equipped.
3. To remove the bulb, pull it out of the socket. Do not
twist the bulb.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket.
5 . Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to replace the socket.
14. Replace the convenience net, if equipped.
6-37
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Dome Lamp
1. Grasp the front and rear centerof the dome
lamp cover at the same time. Then squeeze and
pull downward. (To help pry the sides loose, a
flat-blade screwdriver may be used as an aid
during this procedure.)
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
2. Remove the oldbulb from the small prongs
extending from the dome
lamp base plate; hook the
new bulb onto the prongs.
3. To replace the bulb cover, center it over the base
plate, making sure both the cover and base
the plate
line up properly.Snap the cover firmlyinto place.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer service department.
Replacement blades for your vehicle
are 22 inches
(56 cm) in length.
1. Turn on the wipers to the low wipe setting.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipersare at the
outer positionsof the wiper pattern.The blades
are more accessiblefor removal/replacement while
in this position.
6-38
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from
the windshield.
4. While holding the wiperarm away from the
glass, push the releaseclip from under theblade
connecting pointand pull the blade assembly down
toward the glassto remove it from the wiper arm.
5. Push the new wiper blade securelyon the wiper arm
until you hearthe release clip “click” into place.
For wiper blade replacement lengthand type, also see
“Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leadingtire manufacturer. If youever have questions
about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see
your Chevrolet Warranty booklet
for details.
A
TAUTIC
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires
are dangerous.
a Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result
of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
a Underinflated tirespose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
0 Overinflated tiresare morelikely to be
by a sudden
cut, punctured or broken
impact such aswhen you hit a pothole.
Keep tiresat the recommended pressure.
a Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your
tread is badly worn,or if your tireshave
been damaged, replacethem.
--
6-39
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Inflation
-- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, whichis on the
inside of the trunk lid shows the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold”
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three
hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell
you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right.It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
If your tires have too much
air (overinflation),
you can get thefollowing:
0
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tiresonce a monthor more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should
be at
60 psi (420 Wa).
How to Check
Use a good quality
pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sureto put the valvecaps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks
by keeping outdirt
and moisture.
6-40
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Don’t include the compact spare tirein your tire rotation.
Tires shouldbe rotated every6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotateyour tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” laterin this section for more information.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and
rear inflation pressuresas shown onthe Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that
all wheel nuts
are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque”in
the Index.
The purpose of regular rotationis to achieve more
uniform wearfor all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” inthe Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
I
I
I
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheelnuts become loose
off and cause
after a time. The wheel could come
an accident. When you change
a wheel, remove
any rust or dirtfrom places wherethe wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, youcan
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get allthe rust ordirt off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
n
When rotating your tires, always
use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
6-41
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
When It’s Time for New Tires
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cutor other damage that
One way to tell when it’s
can’t be repaired well becauseof the size or location
time for new tires is to
of
the damage.
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
Buying New Tires
appear when your tires have
To find out what kind and size
of tires you need, look at
only 1/16 inch (1.6mm) or
the Tire-Loading Information label.
less of tread remaining.
YOUneed anew tire if anyof the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewallis cracked, cut or snaggeddeep
enough to show cord
or fabric.
6-42
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The tires installed on your vehicle when
it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get
new tires,
get ones with that same TPCSpec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires are
thatdesigned
to give properendurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other thingsduring normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, theTPC number willbe followed by an “MS”
(for mud andsnow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not
having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are same
the size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) asyour original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
'
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires
by
treadwear, traction andtemperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles soldin the United States.)The
grades are moldedon the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tiresof different sizesor types
(radial and bias-beltedtires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, andyou could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the same
size and type tireson all wheels.
It's all right to drive
with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on yourvehicle.
A
CAUTION:
While the tires availableon General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
I
If you use bias-ply tires on your
vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges coulddevelop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/orwheel could
fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-43
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
-- A, B, C
Treadwear
Temperature
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well onthe government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performanceof tires
depends upon the actual conditionsof their use,
however, andmay depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristicsand climate.
The temperature grades areA (the highest),B, and C ,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of
heat andits ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditionson a specifiedindoor laboratory
test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The gradeC corresponds to a levelof
performance which allpassenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum requiredby law.
--
Traction A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
A, B,
and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt
and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does
not include cornering (turning) traction.
6-44
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or
excessive loading, either separately or combination,
in
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehiclewere aligned andbalanced
carefully atthe factory to giveyou the longest tire life
and best overallperformance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheelbalancing are not
needed. However, if you noticeunusual tire wear or
your vehicle pullingone way or the other, thealignment
may need tobe reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need tobe rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked,or badly rusted
or corroded.If wheel nutskeep coming loose, thewheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should
be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimesbe repaired). See your
dealer if anyof these conditions exist.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original
equipment parts.This way, you willbe sure tohave the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your
Chevrolet model.
I /s\ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
of your
It could affect the braking and handling
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use
the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.
Your dealer will knowthe kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
6-45
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire
or tire
chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more
information.
Used Replacen at Wheels
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t knowhow it’s been used or
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an
accident. If you have to replacea
wheel, use a new GM original equipmentwheel.
6-46
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P225/60Rl6 size tires, don’t
use tire chains. Theycan damage yourvehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another typeof traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tiresize combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting yourvehicle, and don’t
spin yourwheels.
NOTICE: (Continued)
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
NOTICE: (Continued)
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the front tires.
If you have other tires, usetire chains only where
legal and only when you must.Use only SAE Class
ccS”type chainsthat are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible withthe ends securely
fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten
them. If the contact continues,
slow downuntil it
stops. Driving too fast
or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning productscan be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Someare
dangerous if you breathe theirfumes in a closed space.
When you use anythingfrom a containerto clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors
or
windows when you’re cleaningthe inside.
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
CarbonTetrachloride
Acetone
0
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
0
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous-- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle,too.
Don’t use anyof these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these willdamage your vehicle:
0
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
6-47
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often
to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinylor leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
2. Always clean a whole trim panel
or section. Mask
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent
Dry Spot and Soil
surrounding trim along stitch
or welt lines.
Remover. They will clean normal spots and stains very
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from
the container label to
form thick suds.
your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
the Index.)
saturate the material and don’t rub
it roughly.
Here are some cleaning tips:
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
to remove the suds.
Clean up stains as soon as you can-- before they set.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel
or cloth.
0 Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth andlet dry.
Use a clean clothor sponge, and changeto a
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
clean area often. A soft brush may be used
if
stains are stubborn.
Stains caused by such things
as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit,fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
blood can be removed as follows:
area immediatelyor it will set.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
6-48
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomitor urine,
treat thearea with awaterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
0
4. Let dry.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don't get themoff quickly. Use a clean
cloth and a vinyvleather cleaner. See your dealer
for this product.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed
as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
Cleaning Leather
3. If a stain remains,follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
Use asoft cloth withlukewarm water and a mildsoap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with
a soft cloth.Then, let the
leather dry naturally.Do not use heat todry.
Fabric Protection
0
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet thathas been
treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabrics by repellingoil and water,
which are the carriersof most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to clean your upholstery
and carpet often tokeep it looking new.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polishor shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leathershould be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to workinto the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Further information on cleaningis available by calling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
6-49
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cleaning the Topof the Instrument Panel
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Use only mild soap and water to clean
the top surfaces
of the instrument panel.Sprays containing siliconesor
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even makeit difficult tosee through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Glass should be cleaned often.
GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco
smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mildsoap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners
may affect the
surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not bleachor dye safety belts.If you do, it
may severely weaken them.In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
6-50
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they
may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on
the inside of the rear
window, an electric defoggerelement may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshieldis not clear after using the
windshield washer, orif the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap or other material may
be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outsideof the windshieldwith GM
Windshield Cleaner, BonAmi* Powder (non-scratching
glass cleaning powder),GM Part No. 1050011. The
windshield is clean if beadsdo not form when you rinse
it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick tothe wiper
blades and affect theirperformance. Clean the blade
by wiping vigorously with a clothsoaked in
full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades thatlook worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least
every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application maybe required. (See “Recommended
Fluids andLubricants” in the Index.)
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish orcar washing (mild detergent) soaps.
You can get GM-approved cleaningproducts from your
dealer. (See“Appearance Care and Materials”in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to
dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washesmay cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
The paint finishon your vehicleprovides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish orcar washing (mild detergent) soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it cleanby washing it often withlukewarm or
cold water.
Occasional waxing or mild polishingof your vehicle
by hand maybe necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning
products from your dealer.(See “Appearance Care and
Materials” inthe Index.)
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
6-51
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle hasa “basecoatklearcoat” paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always
use waxes and polishes
that arenon-abrasive and made for basecoatklearcoat
a
paint finish.
I NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials suchas calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents,road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they
remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soonas possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout thatcan take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehiclegaraged or covered
whenever possible.
6-52
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly,dry with a soft clean towel.A wax
may then be applied.
The surfaceof these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface.
Don’t take your vehicle through
an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surfaceof these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur
NOTICE:
on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
When applyinga tire dressing always take care
corrosion protection.
to wipeoff any overspray or splash from all
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the
painted surfaces on the body or wheels
of the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
and other debris can collect. Dirt
packed in closed areas
the paint finish.
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or anunderbody car washingsystem can do
Sheet Metal Damage
this for you.
If your vehicleis damaged and requires sheet metal
Chemical Paint Spotting
repair or replacement, make surethe body repair shop
Some weather andatmospheric conditions can create
applies anti-corrosion materialto the parts repaired or
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle.
This
Finish Damage
damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregulardark spots etched
Any stone chips, fractures ordeep scratches inthe finish
into the paint surface.
should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode
quickly and maydevelop into a major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint
job causes this,
Minor chipsand scratches can be repaired with touch-up
Chevrolet will repair,at no charge to the owner, the
materials available from your dealer or other
service
surfaces of new vehicles damagedby this fallout
outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
in your dealer’s bodyand paint shon
of purchase, whichever occurs first.
6-53
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appearance Care Materials Chart
6-54
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
-L
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
III111111111111111111111111111111I1111111111111111111111II
P
I
SAMPLE4UXWM072675
the model designation,
0
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed
from the vehicle.
f1
ASSEMBLY
E N G l N E A 9 8
CODE
MODEL YEAR
0
PLANT
This is the legal identifierfor your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side.You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle.The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certificationand Service Parts
labels and the certificatesof title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the er ne code. This
code will help you identifyyour engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
I NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working
as
they should.
Service Parts IdentificationLabel
You’ll find this label on the inside
of your trunk lid. It’s
very helpfulif you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
your VIN,
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Your vehicle has an air bag system.
Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle’’ in the Index.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you
The headlamp wiringis protected by a circuit breaker in replace a bad fuse withnew
a one of the identical size
the underhood electrical center.
An electrical overload
and rating.
will cause the lampsto go on and off, orin some cases
to remain off.If this happens, have your headlamp
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
system checked right away.
Some fuses arein a fuse
Windshield Wipers
block on the passenger's
side of the instrument panel.
The windshield wipermotor is protectedby a circuit
Pull
off the cover labeled
breaker and a fuse.
If the motor overheatsdue to heavy
FUSES
to expose the fuses.
snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools.If
the overloadis caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
Headlamp Wiring
Power Windows and Other PowerOptions
Circuit breakers in the
fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed.
Additional fuses are in the underhood electrical centers
on the right and left sides
of the engine compartment.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuitsin your vehicle are protected
from short circuitsby a combinationof fuses, circuit
breakers, and fusible thermal links
in the wiring itself.
This greatly reduces thechance of fires causedby
electrical problems.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Fuse
1
Rating
Description
Cigar Lighter-- Instrument Panel and
Console Cigar Lighters
Not Used
Not Used
HVAC -- HVAC Control Assembly
Solenoid Box, Mix Motor, DRL Module,
HVAC Control Head, Defogger Relay,
(S.E.O.) Digital Speedometer
Circuit
Breaker
A
Description
Not Used
B
Not Used
C
Power Windows
D
Power Seats
E
Not Used
5
Hazard Flasher
6
R.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.)
7
Starter Relay
8
Not Used
9
Not Used
10
I/P Electronics Battery-- Chime
Module, Electronic Brake Control
Module (EBCM), Theft-Deterrent
Module, RadioDLC
11
Power Accessory #2 -- Sunroof Control
Unit, (S.E.O.) Accessory Feed
6-57
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Fuse
Rating Description
Fuse
Rating Description
12
Anti-Theft/PCM -- Theft-Deterrent
Module, Powertrain Control Module,
(PCM) IGN Syst. Relay
22
Cruise Control-- Cruise Control Cut-Out
Switch, Cruise Control Module, Turn
Signal Cruise Control Switches
13
ABS -- Electronic Brake Control Module
(EBCM), ABS Relay
23
Stoplamps -- Stoplamp Switch (Brake)
24
Not Used
25
EnglishMetric (S.E.O.)
14
HVAC Blower Motor-- Blower
Motor Relay
15
L.H. Spot Lamp (S.E.O.)
26
Not Used
16
Steering Wheel Control #1-- Steering
Wheel Radio Control Lighting
27
Not Used
28
CTSY Lamps-- Vanity Mirrors, I/P
Compartment Lamp,US Lighted
Rearview Mirror, Dome Lamp
29
Wiper -- Wiper Switch
30
Turn Signal-- Turn Signal Flasher
31
Not Used
32
Power Locks-- Door Lock Relay,
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver
33
DRL MDL -- Daytime Running Lamp
Module, (S.E.O.) Accessory Switch
34
Not Used
17
Not Used
18
Not Used
19
Power Accessory#1 -- Door Lock
Switches, Trunk Courtesy Lamp,O/S
Mirror Switch,(S.E.O.) Emergency
Vehicle-Rear Compartment Lid Lampor
Window Panel Lamps
20
21
Steering Wheel Control#2 -- Steering
Wheel Radio Controls
Air Bag -- Air Bag System
6-58
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
--
Rating Description
Underhood Electrical Center Passenger’s Side
35
Not Used
36
Not Used
Some fuses are in afuse block on the passenger’s side
of
the engine compartment.
37
Rear Defog -- Rear WindowDefogger
Switch Relay
38
Radio -- Radio, Power Drop
39
40
UP Electronics Ignition Feed-Headlamp Switch,Instrument Cluster,
Chime Module, Keyless Entry Receiver,
Stoplamp switch (TCC andBTSI)
(S.E.O.) AccessorySwitch
Not Used
41
Power Drop
42
43
Evap. Sol. -- Evaporation Emissions
(EVAP) Canister Vent Solenoid Valve
Not Used
44
Not Used
45
Not Used
Fuse
6-59
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
RICMPT REL PCM BAT
0
0
0
A/C CONT
TRANS
L
l
IB
Fuse
WCMPT REL
PCM BAT
Description
Remote Trunk Release, Back-up
Lamps, Remote ControlDoor Lock
Receiver
Powertrain Control Module (PCM),
Fuel Pump/Oil Pressure Switch, Fuel
Pump Relay,Fan Cont #1 and #2
Relay
TRANS
Automatic Transaxle
A X CONT
A/C CMPR Relay
6-60
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Fuse
Description
FDNJN
Fuel Injectors
PCM IGN
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor,
Heated Oxygen Sensor
#I 1 and #2
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP)
Canister Purge SolenoidValve
ELEK IGN
Ignition Control (IC) Module
10
U p Fuse Block
12
Passenger’s Side Underhood
Electrical Center, IGN SYST Relay,
WCMPT REL Fuse, PCM BAT Fuse
13
FAN CONT #1 Relay, Circuit
Breaker D
Relay
Description
14
FUEL PUMP
15
A/C CMPR
16
FAN CONT #2 -- Secondary
Cooling Fan (Passenger’s Side)
FAN CONT #1-- Primary Cooling
Fan (Driver’s Side)
17
IGN SYST
--
Underhood Electrical Center Driver's Side
nn
Additional fuses are ina fuse block on the driver's side
of the engine compartment.
FAN #3
I
PARKLPS
HORN
ODD
ABS
Fuse
Description
FAN #3
FAN #3 Relay
PARK LPS
Headlamp Switch
HORN
Horn Relay
ABS
Anti-Lock Brake System
11
Circuit BreakerC, Starter Relay, STR
WHL Control # 2, Power Accessory
#2, and Theft Deterrent Relay
6-61
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Fuse
Description
12
HD LPS -- Circuit Breaker to
Headlamp Switch
13
ABS -- ABS Relay
Relay
Description
14
ABS -- Anti-Lock Brake System
15
FAN #3 -- Secondary Cooling Fan
(Passenger’s Side)
16
HORN
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Bulb Number
Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3156 or 3057
Center High-Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891T2
Front Parkingnurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3357NA
Headlamp, High-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Headlamp, Low-Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Stop/Tail/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Bulb Number
Interior Lamps
10230955
Dome .............................
.
*For service information on
these bulbs, contact your
dealer service department.
6-62
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to“Recommended Fluids andLubricants”
in the Index for more information.
4T60E:
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . 7 quarts (6.7 L)
After Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . . 9.6 quarts (9.2 L)
4T65E:
Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement . . . . . 7.4 quarts (7 L)
After Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . . . 10 quarts (9.5 L)
When drainingheplacing converter; morefluid will
be needed.
Cooling System Including Reservoir
3100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 quarts (10.9L)
3800 (Code K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 quarts (11.0 L)
Refrigerant (R=134a),
Air Conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . 1.88 lbs. (0.85 kg)
Engine Crankcase Oil and Filter Change
3100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.2 L)
3800 (Code K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.2 L)
Windshield WiperBlade Replacement
Length ......................
22 inches (56 cm)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hook
Fuel Tank
3100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 gallons (62.8 L)
3800 (Code K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6 gallons (62.8 L)
*See “AirConditioning Refngerants later in this section.
Note: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be
sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in
this manual. See “RecommendedFluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
-
’?
6-63
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Engine Specifications
3100 (Code M)
3800 (Code K)
V6 ..............................
V6
Type .......................................
191 CID ..........................
231 CID
Displacement ..............................
Compression Ratio ...........................
9.6: 1 ............................
9.25: 1
1-2-3-4-5-6 ......................
Firing Order .............................
1-6-5-4-3-2
ThermostatTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195°F (91 " C ) .....................
195°F (91°C)
Horsepower ..............................
160 @ 5200 .......................
200 @ 5200
6-64
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter
All Engines ...........................
A1208C
Battery
3100 (Code M) .......................
600 CCA
690 CCA
3800 (Code K) .......................
Engine Oil Filter
3 100 (Code M) ..........................
PF47
3800(CodeK) ..........................
PF47
PCV Valve
3100 (Code M) .......................
CV892C
Radiator Cap
All Engines .............................
RC36
Spark Plugs
3100 (Code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41-940
Gap: 0.060” (1.52 mm)
3800 (Code K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41-921
Gap: 0.060” (1.52 mtn)
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheelbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.5 inches (273.0 cm)
Tread Width (Front) . . . . . . . . 59.5 inches(151.2 cm)
Tread Width (Rear) . . . . . . . . 59.1 inches (150.0 cm)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.7 inches (509.9 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79.9 inches(182.5 cm)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.9 inches (136.8 cm)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system
in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant
is used. If
you’re not sure, ask your dealer.
6-65
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
@bNOTES
6-66
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your Chevrolet.Your vehicle needs these services to retain
its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-4
7-4
7- 13
7-13
7-13
7- 14
7- 14
Introduction
Your Vehicle andthe Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
At EachFuel Fill
At Least Once aMonth
At Least Twice a Year
At L.east Once aYear
7- 17
Part C:Periodic Maintenance Inspections
7-17Steering,
Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
7-17
Exhaust System Inspection
7-17
Engine Cooling System Inspection
7-17Throttle
System Inspection
7-17
Brake
System Inspection
7-18Part
D: RecommendedFluidsandLubricants
7-19PartE:
Maintenance Record
7-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
IMPORTANT:
Introduction
I
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helpskeep
to your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance
can even
affect the qualityof the airwe breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.
To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
-7
Protection
Plan
How This Section is Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into
five parts:
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet, or your
Chevrolet dealer for details.
7-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often.Some of these
services canbe complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service centerdo these jobs.
1
Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can
be dangerous.In trying to do
some jobs,you can
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the requiredknow-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have
a qualified
technician do the work.
If you are skilledenough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get
the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications’’in
the Index.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service department
or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists
some recommended products to helpkeep your vehicle
properly maintained.These products, or their
equivalents, shouldbe used whetheryou do the work
yourself or have it done.
‘Tart E: Maintenance Record”provides a place for
you to record the maintenance performed
on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenanceis performed, be
sure to write it down in this
part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be
done.
In addition,it is a good idea to keep your
maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehiclefor
warranty repairs.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services”tells you what
should be checkedand when. It also explains what you
can easily do to help keep
your vehicle in good condition.
7-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want
to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But
we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. you
Or may drive
long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Oryou
may drive it to work, todo errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. You may even need
more frequentchecks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section.
So please read this
section and notehow you drive. If you have any
questions onhow to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your Chevrolet dealer.
7-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
This part tellsyou the maintenance services you should
have done and whenyou should schedule them. If you
go to your dealerfor your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using
genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
these. All parts shouldbe replaced and all necessary
repairs done beforeyou or anyone else drives
the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label.See “Loading Your
Vehicle’’ in the Index.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel.See “Fuel” in the Index.
Maintenance Schedule
J
The services shown in thisschedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)should be performed after 100,000miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km)should be performed at
the same interval after150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services’’and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
* Your vehicle has an Engine Oil Life Monitor.This
monitor will show you when change
to
the engine oil
and filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and
7,500 miles (12 500 km)since your lastoil change.
Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on
before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle
more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months
without an oil andfilter change.
Footnotes
The system won’t detectdust in the oil.So if you drive
in a dusty area,be sure tochange your oil and filter
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the
every
3,000 miles (5000 km)or sooner if the CHG OIL
California AirResources Board has determined that the
SOON light comes on. Remember to reset the Oil Life
failure to perform thismaintenance item will not nullify
Monitor
when the oil hasbeen changed. For more
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
information,
see “CHG OIL SOON Light” in
completion of the vehicle’s usefullife. We, however,
the
Index.
urge that allrecommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals
and the maintenance
+ A good time to check your brakesis during tire
be recorded.
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections’’ inPart C of this schedule.
7-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
MaintenanceSchedule
I
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
I DATE
0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
ACTUAL
M T T .R A CTC:
See “Engine Oil” inthe Index.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote*.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
See “Engine Oil” inthe Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote“f)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index forproper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
I DATE
0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
I
7-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
BY:
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter arechanged, reset monitor.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission ControlService. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
I
SERVICED B Y
I
I
SERVICEDBY:
I
I
MaintenanceSchedule
I
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
DATE
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset
monitor.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
17 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspectfuel
cap gasket for any darnage.Replace parts asneeded.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
ACTUAL I SERVICEDBY:
I MILEAGE
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
I DATE
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
I
See “Engine Oil”in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.
(See footnote +.)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
7-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
MaintenanceSchedule
I
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor,
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Inspect air cleanerfilter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote T.)
17 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index forproper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle
is mainly driven
under one or moreof these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside temperature regularly reaches
90°F (32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and
filter do not require changing.
7-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
I
I
Maintenance Schedule
I
52,500 Miles (87500 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
See “Engine Oil” inthe Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission ControlService.
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission ControlService.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspectfuel cap
gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote”f)
DATE
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY I
I
DATE
1
ACTUAL
SERVICED B Y
MILEAGE
7-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
MaintenanceSchedule
I
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
I DATE
I
DATE
I
Check Oil Life Monitor.
If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
See “Engine Oil”in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote*.)
0 Rotate tires.See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in
the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
Check Oil Life Monitor. Ifengine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
See “Engine Oil”in the Index.
An Emission Control Service.(See footnote *.)
0 Inspect air cleaner filterif you are drivingin dusty conditions.
Replace filterif necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnoteT.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
82,500 Miles (I37 500 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor.If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote* .)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
7-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
I
MaintenanceSchedule
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Check Oil Life Monitor. If engine oil and filter arechanged, reset monitor.
See “Engine Oil” inthe Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuelcap
gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
I7 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection andRotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Check OilLife Monitor. If engine oil and filter are changed, reset monitor.
DATE
I
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
MaintenanceSchedule
I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches
90°F (32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, policeor delivery service.
If you do not useyour vehicle under anyof these conditions, the fluid and
filter donot require changing.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
Drain, flush and refill cooling system
(or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first).See “Engine Coolant’’ in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck.
Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
DATE
I
MILEAGE
I DATE
I
Part B: Owner Checksand Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are ownerchecks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add [email protected]
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs arecompleted at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are theproper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the
windshield washer tank and add
the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid”in the Index
for further details.
At Least Once a Month
It isimportantfor you or a service station attendant to
perfom these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See “Tires” in the Indexfor further details.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems’’ in the
Index for further details.
7-13
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
At Least Twicea Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are
working properly.Look for any other looseor damaged
safety belt system parts.
If you see anything that might
keep a safety beltsystem from doing itsjob, have it
repaired. Have any tornor frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced.(The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper bladesfor wear or cracking.Replace blade
inserts that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or
m i s s areas of the windshield. Alsosee “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
7-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add
if needed. See
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
A fluid lossmay
indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified inPart D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those
for the
hood, rear compartment,glove box door, console door
and any folding seat hardware.Part D tells you what to
use. More frequent lubrication maybe required when
exposed to a corrosiveenvironment.
Starter Switch Check
Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock(BTSI) Check
I
--1
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured.
Follow
the
steps
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both theparking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) andthe
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal,and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear.The starter
should work only inPARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured.
Follow the steps below.
below.
1. Before you start, be sure youhave enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see“Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to applythe regular brake
immediately if the vehicle beginsto move.
3 . With the engine off, turn the key tothe RUN
position, but don’tstart the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move
the shift leverout of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves outof PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI
needs service.
7-15
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turndownhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
the ignition key toLOCK in each shift lever position.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
The key should turnto LOCK only when the shift
the engine running and transaxle
in NEUTRAL (N),
lever is inPARK (P).
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
The key should come out only in LOCK.
pedal. Do this until the vehicleis held by the parking
brake only.
Parking Brakeand Automatic TransaxlePARK (P)
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
Y - :ha--’ im C l ~ ~!k
With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
Ignition TransaxleLock Check
~
I
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injuredandproperty could be damaged. Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should thevehicle begin to move.
7-16
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
F1---.,hingService
Underbody
At least every spring, use plain water
to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
cancollect.
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should be
perforrned at least twice a year (for instance, each spring
and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department
or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure
any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these servicesmay be
found in a service manual.See “Service and Owner
Publications” inthe Index.
build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into
the vehcle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings
and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the
radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure
of the cooling system and
proper operation, a pressure test
pressure cap isrecornended at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, a
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace
Boot and Seal Inspection
any components that have high effort or excessive wear.
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs
of wear or lack
of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses Brake System Inspection
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Inspect the complete system. Inspectbrake lines and
Clean and then inspectthe drive axle boot seals for
hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
chafing, etc. Inspect discbrake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition.Also inspect drumbrake linings
Exhaust System Inspection
for wear and cracks. Inspect other
brake parts, including
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or Check parking brake adjustment. You may need tohave
out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose
your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits
connections or other conditions which could cause a heat or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-17
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below
by name,
part number or specification
may be obtainedfrom
your dealer.
USAGE
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity.To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine,see
“Engine Oil”in the Index.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM [email protected]@
or [email protected]@
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme l l @Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
System
eauivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
7-18
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
I
USAGE
FLUIDLLUBRICANT
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transaxle
[email protected] Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube
% (GM Part
No. 12346241or equivalent).
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM [email protected] Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or
equivalent.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
[email protected] Aerosol
(GM PartNo. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
% (GM Part
Superlube
No. 12346241or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services areperformed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after themaintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “PeriodicMaintenance” can be addedon
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner infomation portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
7-19
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Maintenance Record
7-20
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Maintenance Record
7-21
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Maintenance Record
7-22
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Maintenance Record
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Maintenance Record
7-24
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0 Section 8
Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact
Chevrolet if you need assistance.This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY)Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an AlternativeDispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8-10
8-1 1
8-11
8-1 1
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada
8-1
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CustomerSatisfactionProcedure
Chevrolet
dealers
have
the
facilities,
trained
technicians
any
and up-to-date information to promptly address
concerns you may have. However,if a concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolvedat that level.If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service
or parts
manager, contact the ownerof the dealershipor the
general manager.
8-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
-- If after contactinga member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222- 1020. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre inOshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
STEP*
For helpoutside of the United States and Canada,
call
the following numbers as appropriate:
0
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
In h e r t o Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
0
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish)
0
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
0
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 7631315
0
In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporationin Canada at:
(905) 644-4112.
8-3
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
For prompt assistance, please havethe following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0
0
0
0
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plateat
the top leftof the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle deliverydate and presentmileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call usso we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wishwrite
to
Chevrolet, addressyour inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information bookletfor addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved
in the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities,equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired andwho use Text Telephones(TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872). This toll-free numberwill provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problemcannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisorshave access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services mayincur costs.
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside offerstwo levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy" Care:
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
I
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services,locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As theowner of a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
8-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ROADSIDE Courtesy" Care PROVIDES:
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing(to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE LocksmitldKey Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed the
on road)
FREE Jump Start(at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation
for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offeredin conjunction with thecoverage provided by
the Bumperto Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasersof 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
and light duty trucks. (Please
see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a periodof 3 years/36,000 miles(60 000 km),
whichever occursfirst. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Careare not partof or
included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinueBasic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
8-6
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain aRoadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quahty and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any paymentobligations that may be incurred
for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please
have the
following available to give to the advisor:
Please refer to theRoadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio
for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased inCanada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessiblefrom anywhere
in Canada or the UnitedStates. Please refer tothe
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehiclecolor
Vehiclelocation
Telephone number where youcan be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem
8-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the
coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retail purchasersof 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer
for details).
Courtesy Transportation includes:
One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed during thesame day.
0
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
OR
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieu
of rental for any
OR
overnight warranty repair up to five days,
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., fiiend, neighbor, etc.)in lieu of
rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by your Chevrolet dealer
service management.Claim amounts should
reflect all actual costs.
8-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportationis not part of the
Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
or
Chevrolet reservesthe right to make any changes
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
without notification.
For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet dealer.
Some state insurance regulations make
it impractical to
rent vehicles to people under
21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and have difficulty renting a vehicle,
Chevrolet
will reimburse up to $30/dayfor documented
transportation you receive.
For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle
Coverage periodin the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportationmay be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.
In Canada,please consult yourGM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all50 states andthe District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer toyour Warranty
and OwnerAssistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations andor to discontinueits
participation in thisprogram.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your
new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that, if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier inthis section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arrivingat a solutionto a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation
of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participatesin
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or
lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied afterfollowing the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, youmay contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statementof the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
We prefer you utilizethe Customer Satisfaction
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
TO THE UNITED STATES
may contact theBBB at any time.The BBB will attempt
GOVERNMENT
to resolve thecomplaint serving as an intermediary.
If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
be scheduled where eligible customers
may present their
cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should
case toan impartial third-party arbitrator.
immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
The arbitrator will make a decision which
you may
notifying General Motors.
accept or reject.If you accept the decision,GM will be
bound by that decision.The entire dispute resolution
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an
procedure should ordinarily take about
40 days from the
investigation, andif it finds that a safety defect exists
in
time youfile a claim until a decision is made.
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved
Some state laws may require you to use this program
or
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration programin individual problems between you, your dealer
General Motors.
or inthe courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Chevrolet Customer
To contact NHTSA,you may either call the Auto Safety
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safetyfrom the Hotline.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safetydefect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifyingGeneral
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifyingNHTSA (or TransportCanada)
in a situation like this, we certainlyhope you’ll notify
us. Please call usat 1-800-222-1020 or write:
In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals,owner’s manuals and other service
literature are availablefor purchase for all currentand
past modelGeneral Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI48007-7047
8-11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
1998 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATIO
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle canbe purchased by filling o
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money o
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are writtendirectly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about
the
vehicle. The owner’s manualwill include the Maintenance
Schedule forall models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual providesinformation on unit repair service
procedures, adjustmentsand specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Publications areavailable for current and past
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please
to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.
specify year and model name
of the vehicle.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address s own below or call
1-800-782-4356.Materialcannot be returnedfor credit without packing slip withreturn
1-800-782-4356
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
(Monday-Friday8:OOAM - 6:OO PM EST)
against
the original
order.
FAX Orders Onlv 1-313-865-5927
PUBLICATION FORM
PRICE
TOTAL
,
VEHICLE MODEL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
EACH*
PRICE
NAME
YEAR
ORDER TOLL FREE
R
(NOTE: For CreditCard Holders Only)
S I
T
‘Y
‘
II
9
9
a
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
1998
$90.00
1998
$40.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio
1998
$15.00
Owner’s Manual Without Porffolio
1998
$10.00
G
s
I t
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
Check or Money
Order payableto
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mailcompletedorderformto:
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
HELM, INCORPORATED 0 P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for auotation.
Mastercard
do not send cash.)
p
A
I
p
T
3
c]
-
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
US. Order Processing
Postage
Canadian
(See Note Below)
VISA
GRAND TOTAL
(CUSTOMER’S
NAME)
(ATTENTION)
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O.
BOX NUMBERS)
(ZIP CODE)
(STATE)
DAYTIME
TELEPHONE
NO.
$5.00
T
0
1
7 ml
n
Check here if your billing address
is differentfromyourshippina
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
AREA CODE
~~
d-CHE-ORDQ8 *(Prices are subject
to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.)
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Expiration
Date
’
L
Note to Canadian Customers:All listed prices are quoted in
U S . funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable
in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.
fi
NOTES
8-14
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
0Section 9
Index
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . 6-3
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
How it Works ................................
1-22
1-22
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21.2.49
Servicing ...................................
1-25
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
When Should it Inflate .........................
1-23
Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
Aircleaner ....................................
6-18
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Air Conditioning Refrigerants .....................
6-64
Alignment and Balance. Tire ......................
6-45
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
Player and Automatic Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc
Player and Automatic Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 11
Antenna. Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Antifreeze .....................................
6-22
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Active Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52.4.8
Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51.4.7
Brakes ......................................
4-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
3-15
Anti.Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appearancecare ...............................
6-47
Appearance Care Materials .......................
6-54
Arbitration Program ..............................
8-9
2-39
Armrest.Storage ...............................
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Audio Equipment. Adding ........................
3-18
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ....................
3-17
Audio. Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Audio System. Tips .............................
3-18
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Auto-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
Automatic
Overdrive (0)
............................... 2-20
Transaxle Check ..............................
7-14
Transaxle Fluid ...............................
6-19
Transaxle Operation ...........................
2-18
Auxiliary Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
B a c k - u p Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
6-32
Battery .......................................
Jump Starting .................................
5-3
Replacement. Remote Keyless Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3. 5.5
BBB AutoLine .................................
8-9
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Blizzard ......................................
4-25
Brake
Adjustment ..................................
6-32
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29
Master Cylinder ..............................
6-29
Parking .....................................
2-22
6-32
PedalTravel .................................
Replacing System Parts ........................
6-32
System Warning Light .........................
2-50
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
Transaxle Shift Interlock .......................
2-26
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 15
Wear .......................................
6-31
Brakes. Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Braking ........................................
4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...........................
4-8
.......................... 2- 12
Break.In. New Vehicle
Brightness Control ..............................
2-36
BTSI .........................................
2-26
7-15
BTSICheck ...................................
6-33
BulbReplacement ..............................
8-7
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
6-62
Capacities and Specifications ......................
CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8.2.27.4.26. 4.31
Cassette Deck Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7- 13
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Cassette Tape Player Care ........................
3- 19
9-2
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Cellular Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-36
Center Passenger Position ........................
1-26
Certification Label ..............................
4-27
Chains.Safety .................................
4-32
Chains.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Changing a Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Charging System Light ..........................
2-49
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Chg Oil Soon Light .............................
2-57
ChildRestraints ......................
1-33. 1-35. 1-36
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position. . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position .......... 1-46
TopStrap ...................................
1-41
WheretoPut ................................
1-40
CigaretteLighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
6-56
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
Cleaner.Air ...................................
6-18
6-47
Cleaning ......................................
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Fabric ...................................... 6-48
6-47
FabricProtection .............................
Glass .......................................
6-50
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
6-48
6-50
Instrumentpanel .............................
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
SpecialProblems .............................
6-48
Stains ......................................
6-48
Tires .......................................
6-53
Vinyl .......................................
6-49
6-52
Wheels .....................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Climate-ControlSystem ...........................
3-2
Clock. for Systems with Automatic Tone
Control. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Comfort Controls ................................
3- 1
Compact Disc Care .............................
3-20
3- 13
Compact Disc Player ............................
Compact Disc Player Care........................
3-20
Compact Disc Player Errors.......................
3- 13
Compact Spare Tire .............................
5-37
Console Storage ................................
2-40
4-5
Control of a Vehicle ..............................
ConvenienceNet ...............................
2-40
Convex Outside Mirror ..........................
2-39
Coolant .......................................
6-22
6-25
Adding .....................................
Bleedvalves .................................
5-22
Checking ...................................
6-24
2- 16
Heater. Engine ...............................
Radiator ....................................
5-21
RecoveryTank ...............................
5-18
6-23
WhattoUse .................................
WhenTrailerTowing ..........................
4-34
CoolingSystem ................................
5-16
Courtesy Lamps ................................
2-36
8- 8
Courtesy Transportation...........................
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2.39.2.40
Cupholders . . . . . ...........................
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users
. . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ....................
8-2
Damage. Finish ...............................
6-53
Damage. Sheet Metal ............................
6-53
Daytime Running Lamps .........................
2-35
DeadBattery ...................................
5-3
8-10
Defects. Reporting Safety ........................
4-2
Defensive Driving ...............................
Defogger. Rear Window ..........................
3-5
Defogging .....................................
3-5
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Dimensions.Vehicle ............................ 6-64
Dolby B Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement ....................
6-38
DoorLocks .....................................
2-4
Drive Position. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
DriverPosition .................................
1-12
Driving
City ........................................
4-18
4-2
Defensive ....................................
4-2
Drunken .....................................
Freeway ....................................
4-19
InaBlizzard .................................
4-25
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-5
IntheRain ..................................
4-15
4-14
Night ......................................
4-9
OnCurves ...................................
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Driving (Continued)
On Hill and Mountain Roads ....................
4-21
On Snow or Ice ..............................
4-24
Throughwater ...............................
4-17
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 15
4-23
Winter ......................................
WithaTrailer ................................
4-32
DrunkenDriving ................................
4-2
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . 2.14.2.16.3.18.6.55
Engine
6.11
6.10.
Coolant .....................................
6-22
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 16
Coolant Level Check ..........................
7-13
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Coolant Temperature Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
6-55
Identification ................................
OilLevelCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Overheating .................................
5-13
Runningwhile Parked ......................... 2-27
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
StartingYour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
6-12
Engineoil ....................................
6-13
Adding .....................................
Additives ...................................
6-17
6-13
Checking ...................................
6-17
Used .......................................
What Kind to Use .............................
6-14
9-4
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Whentochange ..............................
Ethanol ........................................
Exhaust. Engine ................................
6-17
6-5
2-27
6-48
Fabric Cleaning ...............................
6-49
FabricProtection ...............................
Features and Controls ............................
2-1
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Filter.Air .....................................
6-18
Filter. Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Finish Damage .................................
6-53
First Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Flashers. Hazard Warning .........................
5-2
Flat Tire. Changing .............................
5-25
Floor Mats ....................................
2-41
Fluids and Lubricants ............................
7-18
6-5
Foreign Countries. Fuel ...........................
1-3
Four-Way Manual Front Seat ......................
..
FrenchLanguageManual ...........................
11
Front Park Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
FrontTowing ..................................
5-10
Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Fuel .......................................... 6-3
6-3. 6-5
Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-5
Fuses and Circuit Breakers .......................
6-56
Gages
2-53
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Gear Positions. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18
GloveBox ....................................
2-39
Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................
4-27
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
4-27
Guide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11..
GVWR .......................................
4-27
Halogen Bulbs ................................
6-33
Hazard Warning Flashers ..........................
5-2
HeadRestraints .................................
1-6
2-35
Headlamps ....................................
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
High/Low Beam Changer ......................
2-30
OnReminder ................................
2-35
Wiring .....................................
6-56
HearingDamage ...............................
3-18
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
2-30
High-Beam Headlamps ..........................
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .........................
Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
Hood
6-8
Checking Things Under .........................
Release ......................................
6-9
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Hydroplaning ..................................
4-17
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check ....................
7-16
Illumination. Sustained Interior ....................
2-37
Inflation. Tire ..................................
6-39
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-17
Brake System ................................
7-17
ExhaustSystems .............................
7-17
Front Drive Axle Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Front Drive Axle Seal .........................
7-17
Radiator and Heater Hose ......................
7-17
Steering ....................................
7-17
Suspension ..................................
7-17
Throttle System .............................. 7-17
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Cleaning ....................................
6-50
Cluster .....................................
2-46
Fuse Block ..................................
6-56
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Jack. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27.5-29.5-30.5-31. 5-33
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
K e y Lock Cylinders Service .....................
Key Reminder Warning ..........................
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-14
2-13
2-2
9-5
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Door ........................................
2-4
Key Lock Cylinder Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tr~nk.......................................
2-9
Loss of Control ................................
4-12
Low Coolant Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.53.6.25
Low Oil Level Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.57. 6.12
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-18
Lubrication Service. Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Labels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Service Parts Identification .....................
6-55
Tire-Loading Information ......................
4-27
Vehicle Identification Number ................... 6-55
Lamps
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Interior .....................................
2-36
OnReminder ................................
2-35
1-6
Latches. Seatback ................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
2-4
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running ....... 2-25
Lighter .......................................
2-40
Lights
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1. 2-49
Anti-Lock Brake System Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52. 4-8
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51. 4-7
Brake System Warning .........................
2-50
ChargingSystem .............................
2-49
Chg Oil Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Interior .....................................
2-36
2-53. 6-25
Low Coolant Warning ....................
Low Oil Level Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57. 6- 12
Oilwarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
1-7. 2-48
Safety Belt Reminder ......................
2-58
Security ....................................
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
MaintenanceRecord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Maintenance Schedule ........................
7-1. 7-5
Owner Checks and Services.....................
7-13
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 18
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Mirrors .......................................
2-38
Convex Outside ..............................
2-37
Inside Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2-38
Power Outside ...............................
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
MountainRoads ................................
4-21
2-29
Multifunction Lever .............................
9-6
.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
N e t . Convenience ..............................
2-40
Neutral. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 19
New Vehicle “Break-In” .........................
2- 12
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Odometer ....................................
2-47
Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Off-Road Recovery .............................
4- 11
6-12
Oil. Engine ....................................
2-56
Oil Warning Light ..............................
OnstarSystem .................................
2-43
(@)Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . 5- 13
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 13
Owner Publications. Ordering .....................
8- 12
Passenger Position ..............................
1-20
Passing ..6....................................
4-11
PASS-Key II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Power
DoorLocks ...................................
2-4
6-56
OptionFuses ................................
Outside Mirrors ..............................
2-38
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Steering .....................................
4-9
Steering Fluid ................................
6-26
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
1-19
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts ....................
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
6-53
Park
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 18
Shifting Into .................................
2-23
Shifting Out of ...............................
2-26
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-22
Brake ......................................
Brake and Automatic Transaxle
PARK (P) Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 16
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Parking On Hills. Leaving ........................
4-34
6-26
Radiator Pressure cap ..........................
Radio Reception ................................
3-18
Radios ........................................ 3-6
Rain. Driving In ................................
4-15
4-17
Rain. OtherTips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReadingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
Rear
1-28
Outside Seat Position ..........................
Safety Belt Comfort Guides .....................
1-31
Seatpassengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-27
1-6
Split Folding Seat ..............................
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
Window Defogger .............................
3-5
Rearview Mirror. Inside Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
9-7
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Reclining Front Seatbacks .........................
1-4
Recovery Tank. Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 18
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning ....................
6-64
Remote
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Wheel ......................................
6-45
Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 8-10
Restraints
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
1-51
Checking ...................................
1-33.1-35. 1-36
Child .............................
1-6
Head ........................................
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 1
7-14
Systemcheck ................................
Reverse. Automatic Transaxle .....................
2- 19
1-20
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
Roadside Assistance ..............................
8-5
Roadside Assistance. Canadian .....................
8-7
Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Rotation. Tires .................................
6-41
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 1
1-7
SafetyBelts ....................................
Adults ......................................
1-12
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
9-8
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Extender ....................................
1-51
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
IncorrectUsage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15.1.49.1.50
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12. 1-28
LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
Rear Comfort Guides ..........................
1-31
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions............ 1-28
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
ReminderLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.7.2.48
Replacing After a Crash........................
1-51
Right Front Passenger Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Smaller Children and Babies ....................
1-33
Use During Pregnancy .........................
1-19
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Safety Chains ..................................
4-32
SafetyDefects.Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .......................
vi
SeatbackLatches ................................
1-6
1-4
Seatback. Reclining Front .........................
Seats
1-3
ManualFour-WayFront ........................
Manual Two- Way Front ......................... 1-2
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Restraint Systems ..............................
1.1
1-2
SeatControls .................................
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Split Folding Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Second Gear. Automatic Transaxre ................. 2-21
SecurityLight ..................................
2-58
2-10
SecuritySystem ................................
Service ........................................
6-2
8- 12
Bulletins. Ordering ............................
Engine Soon Light ............................
2-54
Manuals. Ordering ............................
8-12
Parts Identification Label .......................
6-55
Publications. Ordering .........................
8-12
Publications. Ordering in Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 11
Work. Doing Your Own ......................... 6-2
Service and Appearance Care ......................
6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Service Publications .............................
8- 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-53
ShiftLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle ..........................
2- 18
Into Park (P) .................................
2-23
OutofPUk ..................................
2-26
SignalingTurns ................................
2-30
4-13
Skidding ......................................
3- 18
Sound Equipment. Adding ........................
Spare Tire
5-37
Compact ....................................
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
theSpareTire ..............................
5-29
Specifications and Capacities ......................
6-62
Specifications. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer ...................................
2-47
Stains. Cleaning ................................
6-48
Starter Switch Check ............................
7-15
Starting Your Engine .......................
2.13.2.15
Steam ...................................
5.14.5.15
Steering .......................................
4-9
In Emergencies ...............................
4-10
Power .......................................
4-9
Tips .........................................
4-9
2-29
Wheel. Tilt ..................................
Storage Compartments ...........................
2-39
Storage. Vehicle ................................
6-32
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Sunvisors ....................................
2-41
Sunroof .......................................
2-43
...
Symbols.Vehicle ................................
VIU
Remote Keyless Entry ..........................
2-8
Tachometer ..................................
2-47
Taillamp Bulb Replacement .......................
6-36
TapePlayerCare ...............................
3-19
2-9
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
Theft-DeterrentFeature. .........................
THEFTLOCK" ................................
3-15
6-26
Thermostat ....................................
2-29
Tilt Steering Wheel .............................
Time. Setting the ................................
3-6
Tirechains ....................................
6-46
TireLoading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
9-9
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39
Alignment and Balance ........................
6-45
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Changing a Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Cleaning .................................... 6-53
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Inflation ....................................6-39
Inflationcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Inspection and Rotation ........................ 6-41
Loading .................................... 4-27
Pressure .....................................6-39
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools............... 5-26
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Storing the SpareT i e and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Temperature .................................
6-44
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-43
Used Replacement Wheels ......................6-46
WearIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Towing Your Vehicle ............................. 5-8
Trailer
Backingup .................................
4-33
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
9-10
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Driving on Grades ............................4-33
Drivingwith ................................. 4-32
FollowingDistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Making Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Parking on Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Passing ..................................... 4-32
Safety Chains ................................
4-32
Tongueweight ...............................
4-30
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Towing .....................................4-29
4-33
Turnsignals .................................
Weight ..................................... 4-30
Transaxle Fluid. Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Transmitters. Remote Keyless Entry ................. 2-6
Transportation.Courtesy .......................... 8-8
Before Leaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
TrUnk
Lock ........................................
2-9
Release. Remote ...............................
2-9
TTYUsers ..................................... 8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals............... 2-30
Turn Signalhlultifunction Lever ...................2-29
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Two-way Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Underbody Flushing Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Underhood Electrical Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.59.6.60
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vu
Damage
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Identification Number ......................... 6-55
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
VisorVanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Visors, Sun ....................................
2-41
. I
w a r n i n g Devices ...............................
5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1
Wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
NutTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Auto-Down ................................. 2-28
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2-31
WindshieldWasher .............................
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31.6.28
Fluid Level Check ............................
7-13
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
4-23
Winter Driving .................................
Wiper Blade Check .............................
7-14
Wiring. Headlamp ..............................
6-56
WreckerTowing .................................
5-8
Wrench. Wheel .................................
5-28
Y o u r Driving and the Road
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
9-11
.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
-
0 Service Station Checkpoints
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
P5-18 ANDP6-25
>5
-
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
P6-12
II
SECONDARY
I
REMOTE
BATTERY
TERMINAL
P5-4
‘ I
hl
‘
/
WINDSHIELD
WASHER FLUID
P6-28
TI RES
P6-39
HOOD
RELEASE
RELEASE
P6-9
‘
REMOTE TRUNK
P2-9
FUEL
DOOR
P6-6
For detailed information, referto the page number listed, or see
the Index in the backof the owner’smanual.
9-12
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement